2010_5seriesgranturismo_ownersmanual

Owner's Manual forVehicle

The Ultimate DrivingMachine

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500

535i550i

Owner's Manual for VehicleThank you for choosing a BMW.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control youwill have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.Also use the integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐tains important information on vehicle operation that will help youmake full use of the technical features available in your BMW. Themanual also contains information designed to enhance operatingreliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining thevalue of your BMW.Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐chures in the onboard literature.We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.BMW AG


© 2010 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.English III/10, 03 10 500Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.


ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 266.

Using this Owner's Manual6 Notes

At a glance12 Cockpit19 iDrive25 Voice activation system27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls32 Opening and closing48 Adjusting61 Transporting children safely65 Driving75 Displays86 Lamps90 Safety101 Driving stability control systems107 Driving comfort128 Climate control134 Interior equipment140 Storage compartments

Driving tips146 Things to remember when driving

Navigation154 Navigation

Entertainment172 Tone174 Radio181 CD/multimedia196 Rear entertainment

Communication204 Telephone213 Contacts216 BMW Assist

Mobility224 Refueling226 Fuel227 Wheels and tires234 Engine compartment236 Engine oil238 Maintenance240 Replacing components246 Breakdown assistance251 Care

Reference256 Technical data259 Short commands for voice activation

system266 Everything from A to Z

Seite 5


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

NotesUsing this Owner's ManualThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Additional sources of informationShould you have any questions, your servicecenter will be glad to advise you at any time.Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: bmwusa.com.

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐tion.* Indicates special equipment, country-specificequipment and optional accessories, as well asequipment and functions not yet available at thetime of printing."..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐lect individual functions.›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐tivation system.››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to helpprotect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Recommends that you study the relevant

section of this Owner's Manual in connectionwith a particular part or assembly.

Your individual vehicleYou have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐vidualized equipment and features.This Owner's Manual describes the entire arrayof options and equipment available for a specificmodel.As a result, the manual may contain accessoriesand equipment that you may not have specifiedfor your own vehicle.All options and special equipment are markedwith an asterisk *.For options and equipment not described in thisOwner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐mentary Owner's Manuals.On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls arearranged differently than shown in the illustra‐tions.

Status at publicationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐icy of constant development that is conceivedto ensure that our vehicles continue to embodythe highest quality and safety standards. In rarecases, therefore, the features described in thisOwner's Manual may differ from those in yourvehicle.

For your own safetyMaintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics, re‐quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐ods.Therefore, have this work performed only by aBMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ately trained personnel.

Seite 6

6Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500

Note

s

If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.

Parts and accessoriesBMW recommends using parts and accessoriesapproved by BMW for this purpose.Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ine BMW parts and accessories, other productsapproved by BMW and related qualified advice.BMW has tested these products for safety andsuitability in relation to BMW vehicles.BMW can assume responsibility for them. How‐ever, we cannot assume any responsibilitywhatsoever for parts and accessories that havenot been specifically approved by BMW.BMW cannot evaluate whether each individualproduct from another manufacturer can be usedwith BMW vehicles without presenting a safetyhazard. This guarantee is also not applicablewhen country-specific government approvalhas been granted. Testing of this kind may failto embrace the entire range of potential operat‐ing conditions to which components might beexposed on BMW vehicles. Such productscould conceivably fail to comply with BMW'sown stringent quality standards.

Parts and AccessoriesFor your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐chase accessories tested and approved byBMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ously acquire the assurance that they have beenthoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimumperformance when installed on your vehicle.BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐fects in material and workmanship. BMW will notaccept any liability for damage resulting from in‐stallation of parts and accessories not approvedby BMW. BMW cannot test every product madeby other manufacturers to verify if it can be usedon a BMW safely and without risk to either thevehicle, its operation, or its occupants. GenuineBMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐sional advice on using these items, are available

from all BMW centers. Installation and operationof non-BMW approved accessories such asalarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,wheels, suspension components, brake dustshields, telephones, including operation of anymobile phone from within the vehicle withoutusing an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, maycause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle'selectrical system or affect the validity of theBMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW centerfor additional information. Maintenance, re‐placement, or repair of the emission control de‐vices and systems may be performed by any au‐tomotive repair establishment or individualusing any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobilecomponents and parts, including componentsfound in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐productive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain products ofcomponent wear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects or other reproductive harm.Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washingthoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

Seite 7


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty▷ California Emission Control System Limited

WarrantyDetailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to deliverthe full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐erate your vehicle in another country or region,you may be required to adapt your vehicle tomeet different prevailing operating conditionsand homologation requirements. You shouldalso be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐tions or exclusions for such country or region. Insuch case, please contact Customer Relationsfor further information.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform the Na‐tional Highway Traffic Safety AdministrationNHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of NorthAmerica, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, NewJersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or BMW of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐

rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information about mo‐tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephonethe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contactTransport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada,ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330 SparksStreet, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

Seite 8


Note

s

Seite 9


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

At a glanceThese overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with yourvehicle. You will also become quickly acquaintedwith the available control concepts and options.


CockpitAll around the steering wheel

1 Seating comfort functions*Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐ory* 57

Active seat* 50

2 Roller sunblinds* 453 Safety switch for the rear windows and roller

sunblinds* 454 Power windows 445 Exterior mirror operation 586 Driver assistance systems*

Active Blind Spot Detec‐tion* 98

Collision warning* 112

Lane departure warning* 97

Night Vision with pedestrian de‐tection* 123

Head-up Display* 126

7 LampsFront fog lamps 89

Parking lamps 86

Low beams 86

Automatic headlamp con‐trol* 87Daytime running lights* 87High-beam Assistant* 88Instrument lighting 89

8 Steering column stalk, left

Seite 12


Cock

pit

Turn signal 70

High beams, head‐lamp flasher 70

High-beam Assistant* 88

Roadside parking lamps 87

Computer* 78

9 Steering wheel buttons, leftStore speed 114, 108

Resume speed 115, 109

Cruise control on/off, inter‐rupt 114, 107

Increase distance* 109

Decrease distance* 108

10 Instrument cluster 1411 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation* 25

Telephone* 204

12 Steering column stalk, rightWindshield wipers 70

Rain sensor* 71

Clean the windshields and head‐lamps* 70

13 Start/stop the engine and switchthe ignition on/off 65

14 Horn15 Steering wheel heating* 60

16 Adjust the steering wheel 60

17 Open the tailgate* 39

18 Unlock the hood

Seite 13


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge 772 Speedometer3 Indicator/warning lamps 144 Tachometer 765 Engine oil temperature 76

6 External temperature* 757 Electronic displays 168 Miles, trip miles 759 Clock* 8010 Reset miles 75

Indicator/warning lampsInstrument cluster

The indicator and warning lamps can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.Several of the lamps are checked for properfunctioning when the engine is started or the ig‐nition is switched on, and light up briefly in theprocess.

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal

Parking brake

Automatic Hold

Front fog lamps*

High beams

Seite 14


Cock

pit


High-beam Assistant*

Parking lamps, headlamp control

Active Cruise Control*

Vehicle detection, Active CruiseControl*

Cruise control*

Lane departure warning*

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

DSC Dynamic Stability Control orDTC Dynamic Traction Control

Tire Pressure MonitorFlat Tire Monitor

Safety belts

Airbag system


Steering system

Engine functions

Brake system

Brake system in Canadian models

Antilock Brake System ABS

Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐dian models

Text messagesText messages in combination with a symbol inthe instrument cluster explain a Check Controlmessage and the meaning of the indicator andwarning lamps.

Supplementary text messagesAdditional information on the Control Display,e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐trol, refer to page 83.The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐matically.

Seite 15


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Instrument cluster, electronic displays

1 Symbols and messages, e.g., warnings 142 Range 773 Computer* 784 Navigation display* 154

Service display 82

5 Selection list, e.g., radio 776 Transmission displays 74

Seite 16


Cock

pit

All around the center console

1 Headliner 182 Control Display 193 Glove compartment 1404 Air vent 1315 Hazard warning system 246

Central locking system 38

6 Radio 174CD/Multimedia 181

7 Automatic climate control 1288 Controller with buttons 199 Parking brake 66

Auto Hold 68

10 PDC Park Distance Con‐trol* 115Top View* 118Backup camera* 120Side View* 122

11 Dynamic Driving Control 103

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol 103

12 Transmission selector lever

Seite 17


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request* 246

2 Glass sunroof, powered* 45

3 Indicator lamp, front passengerairbag* 92

4 Reading lamps* 89

5 Interior lamps 89

Seite 18


Cock

pit

iDriveThe conceptThe iDrive combines the functions of a multitudeof switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a tripTo avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐pants and to other road users, never attempt touse the controls or enter information unless traf‐fic and road conditions allow this.◀

Controls at a glanceControls

1 Control Display2 Controller with buttons

The buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The controller can be used to selectmenu items and create the settings.

Control Display

Notes▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions, refer to page 253.▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display canbe damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button.2. "Switch off control display"

Switching onPress the controller again to switch the screenback on.

ControllerSelect menu items and create settings.1. Turn.

2. Press.

Seite 19


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

CD Opens the CD/Multimediamenu.

NAV Opens the Navigation mapview.

TEL Opens the Telephonemenu.

BACK Displays the previouspanel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating conceptOpening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the mainmenu.

Selecting menu itemsMenu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menuitem is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's ManualIn the Owner's Manual, menu items that can beselected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,"Settings".

Changing between panelsAfter a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", anew panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.▷ Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previouspanel is displayed.The previous panel is opened again bypressing the BACK button. In this case, thecurrent panel is not closed.

▷ Move the controller to the right.A new panel is opened on top of the previousdisplay.

Seite 20


iDriv

e

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicatethat additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menuWhen a menu is opened, it generally opens withthe panel that was last selected in that menu. Todisplay the first panel of a menu:▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed.▷ Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menuPress the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to theright repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐played.

Options menuThe "Options" menu consists of various areas:▷ Screen settings, for instance. "Split

screen".This area remains unchanged.

▷ Control options for the selected main menu,e.g., for "Radio".

▷ If applicable, further operating options forthe selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired settingis displayed.


Activating/deactivating the functionsSeveral menu items are preceded by a check‐box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu itemactivates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clockSetting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu isdisplayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the leftto display "Time/Date".

Seite 21


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours andpress the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes andpress the controller.

Status informationStatus fieldThe following information is displayed in the sta‐tus field at the top right:▷ Time.▷ Current entertainment source.▷ Sound output, on/off.▷ Wireless network reception strength.▷ Telephone status.▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbolsThe symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

Traffic bulletins* switched on. One ofthe symbols is displayed.

HD Radio* switched on.

Satellite radio* switched on

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call*

Missed call*

Wireless network receptionstrength*. Symbol flashes: networksearch

Wireless network not available*

Bluetooth* activated

Roaming* is active

Text message received*

Check SIM card*

SIM card* blocked

SIM card* missing

Enter PIN*

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD* player

Music collection*

Gracenote® database*

AUX-IN port

Rear AUX-IN port*

Rear AUX-IN port on the right*

USB audio interface*

Seite 22


iDriv

e

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions* switched off

Request current vehicle position*

Split screen*General informationAdditional information can be displayed on theright side of the split screen, e.g., informationfrom the computer.In the divided screen view, the so-called splitscreen, this information remains visible evenwhen you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button.2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button.2. "Split screen"3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected.4. "Split screen content"5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memorybuttonsGeneral informationThe iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐tions, phone numbers and entry points into themenu.The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Saving a function1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for morethan 2 seconds.

Running a functionPress the button.The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialedwhen a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignmentUse a finger to touch the buttons. Do not weargloves or use objects.The key assignment is displayed at the top edgeof the screen.

▷ To display short information: touch the but‐ton.

▷ To display detailed information: touch thebutton for an extended period.

Seite 23


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds.2. "OK"

Entering letters and numbers1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐

bers.2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed.3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the letteror number.

Press the controller for an extendedperiod: delete all letters or numbers.

Enter a blank space.

Switching between letters andnumbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be‐tween entering letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lowercase lettersDepending on the menu, you can switch be‐tween entering upper and lower case letters:

Symbol Function

Move the controller up: switchfrom upper to lower case letters.

Move the controller up: switchfrom lower to upper case letters.

Entry comparisonEntry of names and addresses: the selection isnarrowed down every time a letter is entered andletters may be added automatically.The entries are continuously compared to thedata stored in the vehicle.▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐

try for which data is available.▷ Destination search: town/city names can be

entered using the spelling of language avail‐able on the Control Display.

Seite 24


iDriv

e

Voice activation system*The concept▷ The voice activation system can be used to

operate equipment by means of spokencommands.

▷ The system encompasses special micro‐phones on the outer edge of the headliner.

▷ Most menu items on the Control Display canbe voiced as commands. The systemprompts you to make your entries.

▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐ual to use with the voice activation system.

RequirementsOn the Control Display, set the language to beused with the voice activation system to enablethe system to identify the voice commands.Set the language, refer to page 81.

Using voice activationActivating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Say the command.The command is displayed in the instrumentcluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐cates that the voice activation system is active.If no further commands are available, continueoperating the equipment via the iDrive.

Terminating the voice activationsystemBriefly press the button on the steering wheelor ›Cancel‹.

Possible commandsHaving possible commands read aloudThe commands available in each case dependon the menu item selected on the Control Dis‐play.Have the available spoken instructions readaloud using ›Voice commands‹.If, for example, ›Settings‹ is selected, the com‐mands to the settings are read aloud.

Executing functions using shortcommandsFunctions on the main menu can be performeddirectly by means of short commands, irrespec‐tive of which menu item is currently selected,e. g., ›Vehicle status‹.List of short voice activation commands, refer topage 259.

Example: playing back a CD1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.


3. ›C D and multimedia‹The medium last played is played back.


5. ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialogYou can set whether the system should use thestandard dialog or a shorter version.In the shorter version of the voice dialog, theprompts and responses from the system are ab‐breviated.

Seite 25


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech mode:"4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button while giving an instruc‐tion until the desired volume is set.▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.▷ The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Notes on EmergencyRequestsDo not use the voice activation system to initiatean Emergency Request. In stressful situations,the voice and vocal pitch can change. This canunnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐ephone connection.Instead, use the SOS button*, refer topage 246, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language ofthe voice activation system.

▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐mon pronunciation of the station name.

▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroofclosed to prevent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Seite 26


Voic

e ac

tivat

ion

syst

em

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicleOwner's Manual in the vehicleThe Owner's Manual can be displayed on theControl Display in accordance with the equip‐ment selected.

Methods of opening the Owner'sManualThe following methods are available:▷ Quick reference: "Quick reference"▷ Key word search: "Owner's Manual"▷ Using pictures: "Search by pictures"

1. Press the button.2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".3. Press the controller.4. Select "Quick reference", "Search by

pictures" or "Owner's Manual".

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link accessTurn the controller until the next or previouspage is displayed.

Page by page without link accessLeaf through the pages directly while skippingthe links.Highlight the symbol once. Now simply pressthe controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.

Context-sensitive help - section of theOwner's Manual referring to thepresent functionThe relevant information can be opened directly.

Opening via the iDriveTo move directly from the application on theControl Display to the options menu:

1. Press the button or move the controllerto the right repeatedly until the "Options"menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message on theControl Display:"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo change from a function, e.g., radio, to theOwner's Manual on the Control Display and toswitch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the controllerto the right repeatedly until the "Options"menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Man‐

ual.

4. Press the button again to return to thefunction displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the pageof the Owner's Manual displayed last.

Seite 27


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

To switch back and forth repeatedly betweenthe function displayed last and the page of theOwner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23,and called up directly.

Storing1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for morethan 2 seconds.

ExecutingPress the button.The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐

mediately.

Seite 28


Inte

grat

ed O

wner

's M

anua

l in th

e ve

hicl

e

Seite 29


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

ControlsThis chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control ofyour vehicle. All features and accessories that are

useful for driving and your safety, comfort andconvenience are described here.


Opening and closingRemote control/keyButtons on the remote control

1 Unlocking2 Locking3 Opening the small tailgate4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea‐

ture, opening the large tailgate*

General informationThe vehicle is supplied with two remote controlswith keys.Every remote control contains a replaceablebattery.The settings called up and implemented whenthe vehicle is unlocked depend on which remotecontrol is used to unlock the vehicle, PersonalProfile, refer to page 33.In addition, information about service require‐ments is stored in the remote control, Servicedata in the remote control, refer to page 238.

Integrated key

Press the button on the back of the remote con‐trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.The integrated key fits the following locks:▷ Driver's door.▷ Storage compartment in the front center

armrest.The storage compartment contains a switch forseparately securing the tailgate, refer topage 41.

Replacing the battery

1. Take the integrated key out of the remotecontrol.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐

ment; see arrow 2.4. Insert a battery of the same type with the

positive side facing upwards.5. Press the cover closed.

Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐ter or to your service center.

Seite 32


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

New remote controlsYou can obtain new remote controls from yourservice center.

Loss of the remote controlsLost remote controls can be blocked by yourservice center.

Emergency detection of remote controlIt is possible to switch on the ignition or start theengine in situations such as the following:▷ Remote control malfunction.▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote

control by external sources.▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.A message is displayed on the Control Displayif an attempt is made to switch on the ignition orstart the engine.

Starting the engine in case ofemergency detection of remote control

If a corresponding message appears on theControl Display, as shown, hold the remote con‐trol against the marked area on the steering col‐umn and press the Start/Stop button within10 seconds while depressing the brake.

Personal ProfileThe conceptYou can set several of your vehicle's functionsto suit your personal needs and preferences.▷ The settings are automatically saved in the

profile currently activated.

▷ The remote control used is detected whenthe vehicle is unlocked and the stored profileis called up.

▷ Your personal settings will be recognizedand called up again even if the vehicle hasbeen used in the meantime by someone elsewith another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for up to threeremote controls.

Transmitting the settingsYour personal settings can be taken with you toanother vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐file function. For more information, contact yourservice center.Transmission takes place via:▷ The USB interface in the glove compart‐

ment onto a USB device.

Profile management

Opening the profilesA different profile can be called up than the oneassociated with the remote control currently inuse.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"

3. Select a profile.

Renaming profiles1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected.3. Open "Options".

Seite 33


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profilesThe settings of the active profile are reset totheir default values.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected.3. Open "Options".4. "Reset current profile"

Importing profilesExisting settings and contacts are overwrittenwith the imported profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Import profile"

4. USB interface, refer to page 140: "USBdevice"

Exporting profilesMost settings of the active profile and the savedcontacts can be exported.

1. "Settings"

2. "Profiles"3. "Export profile"4. USB interface, refer to page 140: "USB

device"

Display profile list during startThe profile list can be displayed during eachstart for selecting the desired profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Options"4. "Display user list at startup"

Personal Profile settingsThe following functions and settings can bestored in a profile.More information on the settings can be foundunder:▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re‐

fer to page 112.▷ Exterior mirror position, refer to page 58.▷ CD/Multimedia, refer to page 181: audio

source listened to last.▷ Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re‐

fer to page 104.▷ Driver's seat position, refer to page 48.▷ Programmable memory buttons, refer to

page 23: assignment.▷ Head-up Display, refer to page 126: selec‐

tion, brightness and position of display.▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to

page 86: time setting.▷ Tone, refer to page 172: tone settings.▷ Automatic climate control, refer to

page 128: settings.▷ Steering wheel position, refer to page 60▷ Navigation, refer to page 154: map views,

route criteria, voice output on/off.▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer

to page 123: selection of functions and typeof display.

Seite 34


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

▷ Daytime running lights*, refer to page 87:current setting.

▷ Park Distance Control PDC, refer topage 173: adjusting the signal tone volume.

▷ Radio, refer to page 174: stored stations,station listened to last, special settings.

▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120: selec‐tion of functions and type of display.

▷ Side View, refer to page 122: selection ofthe display type.

▷ Language on the Control Display, refer topage 81.

▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 97:last setting, on/off.

▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer topage 98: last setting, on/off.

▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer topage 70.

▷ Locking the vehicle, refer to page 38: aftera brief period or after starting to drive.

Central locking systemThe conceptThe central locking system becomes activewhen the driver's door is closed.The system simultaneously engages and re‐leases the locks on the following:▷ Doors.▷ Tailgate.▷ Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside▷ Via the remote control.▷ Via the driver's door lock.▷ Via the door handles*.▷ Via the button on the tailgate*.The following takes place simultaneously whenlocking/unlocking the vehicle via the remotecontrol:

▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.Doors cannot be unlocked using the lockbuttons or the door opener.

▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps andcourtesy lamps* are switched on and off.

▷ The alarm system*, refer to page 42, isarmed or disarmed.

Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system.

If the vehicle has been locked from inside, thefuel filler flap remains unlocked.If an accident of a certain severity occurs, thecentral locking system unlocks automatically.The hazard warning system and interior lampscome on.

Opening and closing: from theoutsideUsing the remote control

General informationTake the remote control with youPeople or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐side. Always take the remote control with youwhen leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle canthen be opened from the outside.◀

UnlockingPress the button.The vehicle is unlocked.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.

Seite 35


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

1. "Settings"2. "Door locks"3. "Unlock button:"

4. Select the desired function:▷ "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel fillerflap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐locks the entire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Convenient openingThe remote control can be used to simultane‐ously open the windows and the glass sunroof*.

Press and hold the button on the re‐mote control.

The windows and the glass sunroof* open.Releasing the button stops the motion.

LockingPress the button on the remote control.

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot beunlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

Switching on the interior lamps,courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps

Press the button on the remote control

with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode*You can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote controlfor at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching on the headlamp courtesydelay feature

Briefly press the button on the remotecontrol.

The duration, refer to page 86, can be set inthe Control Display.

Opening the tailgatePress the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second.

The small tailgate opens slightly.The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐fore opening.

With automatic trunk lid operation*:

Press the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second and release.

The large tailgate opens automatically.

Note the opening height of the large tail‐gate

The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that there is sufficient clearance whenthe large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage mayresult.◀The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it waspreviously locked or unlocked.To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, donot place the remote control into the trunk. Thetailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushedclosed.

Provide edge protection

Seite 36


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear windowwhile driving and damage the heating wires ofthe rear window. Provide edge protection.◀

Confirmation signals from the vehicle1. "Settings"2. "Door locks"3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐

tion signals.▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"

MalfunctionLocal radio waves may interfere with the remotecontrol.If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐locked with the remote control, the battery isdischarged. Replace the battery, refer topage 32.If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at thedoor lock using the key.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is governedby the following:FCC ID:▷ LX8766S.▷ LX8766E.▷ LX8CAS.▷ LX8CAS2.▷ MYTCAS4.Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐

ence, and▷ this device must accept any interference re‐

ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot beunlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

Remove the key before pulling the doorhandle

Before pulling the outside door handle, removethe key to avoid damaging the paintwork and thekey.◀In some country-specific versions, the alarmsystem*, refer to page 42, is triggered if thevehicle is unlocked via the door lock.Unlock the vehicle using the remote control toswitch off the alarm.

Convenient operation*The door lock can be used to simultaneouslyoperate the windows and the glass sunroof*.

Seite 37


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Opening/closingWith the door closed, turn the key to the Unlockor Lock position and hold it there.Turning the key back to the original positionstops the motion.

Monitor the closing processMonitor the closing process to ensure that

no one becomes trapped; otherwise, injuriesmay result.◀

Manual operationIf an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlockthe vehicle using a key via the door lock on thedriver's door.

Opening and closing: from theinside

Locking and unlockingPress the button in the vehicle.The doors and the tailgate are locked or

unlocked when the front doors are closed, butthey are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.You can set how the vehicle should be unlocked;refer to Unlocking, refer to page 35.

Automatic lockingThe setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

1. "Settings"2. "Door locks"3. Select the desired function:

▷ "Lock if no door is opened"The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if a door is notopened.

▷ "Lock after start. to drive"The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive away.

DoorsAutomatic Soft ClosingTo close the doors, push lightly.It is closed automatically.

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

TailgateOpening

Opening the small tailgateThe tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐fore opening.

Seite 38


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

▷ Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 1.▷ Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second.▷ Push the button in the driver's foot‐

well.The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐tionary, provided that the tailgate has notbeen locked.

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heatingwires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐tion.◀

Opening the large tailgateNote the opening height of the large tail‐gate

The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that there is sufficient clearance whenthe large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage mayresult.◀

Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 2, andopen the tailgate.

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heating

wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐tion.◀

Closing

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgatecan be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐gate.

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the tail‐

gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Automatic Soft ClosingTo close the tailgate fully, press down lightlyonly.It is closed automatically.

Locking the vehicle*

Press the button on the open tailgate.The vehicle is locked completely.

Automatic trunk lid operation*

Adjusting the opening heightYou can set how far the large tailgate shouldopen.

Seite 39


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Adjusting the opening heightWhen setting the opening height, ensure

that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cmabove the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling maynot be high enough for the open tailgate if theload situation changes.◀1. "Settings"2. "Tailgate"3. Turn the controller until the desired opening

height is selected.

Opening the large tailgateNote the opening height of the large tail‐gate

The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that there is sufficient clearance whenthe large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage mayresult.Adjust the opening height of the large tailgateaccording to the given situation.◀The large tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐justed opening height.

▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐gate, arrow 2.

▷ Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second and re‐lease.

Pressing the button again stops the motion.The opening process is interrupted as well:▷ When the vehicle starts moving.▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐

well.▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the

tailgate.

Opening the large tailgate further

Press and hold the button on the inside of thelarge tailgate, arrow 2, to open the large tailgateto the maximum opening height.Releasing the button stops the motion.

Closing the large tailgate

▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside ofthe large tailgate.The tailgate closes automatically.Pressing again stops the motion.

Seite 40


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

▷ With Comfort Access:Press the button on the open tailgate.Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐cle is locked.

▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐gate, arrow 2.Pressing again stops the motion.

The closing process is not interrupted when thevehicle starts moving.

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the tail‐

gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Manual operationIn the event of an electrical malfunction, operatethe unlocked tailgate manually with a slow andsmooth motion.

Locking separatelyThe tailgate can be locked separately, using theswitch in the front center armrest.

▷ The tailgate is locked, ar‐row 1.The small and large tailgatesare locked.

▷ The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐row 2.

Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. Thissecures the tailgate and disconnects it from thecentral locking system.When the center armrest is locked, the tailgatecannot be accessed. This is beneficial when thevehicle is parked using valet service. The infra‐red remote control can be handed out withoutthe key.

Emergency unlocking*

Pull the handle inside the trunk.The tailgate is unlocked.

Comfort Access*The conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activatingthe remote control.All you need to do is to have the remote controlwith you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.The vehicle automatically detects the remotecontrol when it is nearby or in the passengercompartment.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.▷ Starting the engine.

Functional requirements▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must

be located outside of the vehicle.

Seite 41


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is notpossible until after approx. 2 seconds.

▷ The engine can only be started if the remotecontrol is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remotecontrolThe functions can be controlled by pressing thebuttons or via Comfort Access.

Unlocking

Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐sponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, withyour finger for approx. 1 second.This corresponds to pressing the button.To save battery power, ensure that the ignitionand all electronic systems and/or power con‐sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐hicle.

Unlocking the tailgate separatelyPress the middle button on the exterior of thetailgate, refer to page 38, to open the small tail‐gate.

This corresponds to pressing the button.Press the right-hand button on the exterior ofthe tailgate to open the large tailgate.This corresponds to pressing the button.

Ignition onPressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐nition on.When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal;otherwise, the engine will start.

MalfunctionComfort Access may not function properly if itexperiences interference from local radio waves,e.g., mobile phones.If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using thebuttons on the remote control or use a key in thedoor lock.To subsequently start the engine, hold the re‐mote control against the marked area on thesteering column, refer to page 33.

Alarm system*The conceptThe vehicle alarm system responds to:▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion

sensor, refer to page 43.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.▷ By flashing the high beams.

Arming and disarming the alarmsystemWhen you lock or unlock the vehicle, either withthe remote control or at the door lock, the alarmsystem is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Seite 42


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Door lock and armed alarm systemUnlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarmon some country-specific versions.This alarm can only be ended by pressing thebutton on the remote control.

Tailgate and armed alarm systemThe tailgate can be opened using the remotecontrol, even if the alarm system is armed.▷ Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second.The small tailgate opens slightly.

▷ With automatic trunk lid operation*:Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second and release.The large tailgate opens automatically.

Note the opening height of the large tail‐gate

The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that there is sufficient clearance whenthe large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage mayresult.◀After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐tored again by the alarm system. The hazardwarning system flashes once.

Panic mode*Press the button on the remote controlfor at least 3 seconds.

Switching off the alarm▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.▷ Unlock the vehicle via the driver's door lock

using the key*.▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the

remote control with you, pull on the doorhandle.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearviewmirror

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every2 seconds:The system is armed.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:The doors, hood or tailgate is not closedproperly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐cured.After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashescontinuously. The interior motion sensor isnot active.

▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:The vehicle has not been tampered with.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlockinguntil the engine is started, but no longer thanapprox. 5 minutes:An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations suchas attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and glass sunroof must be closedfor the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorcan be switched off together, such as in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer.

Seite 43


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote controltwice in succession.

The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐onds and then flashes continuously.The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorare switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windowsGeneral information

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,cannot operate the power windows and injurethemselves.◀

Opening

▷ Press the switch to the resistancepoint.The window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ance point.The window opens automatically.

Pressing again stops the motion.

ClosingDanger of pinching

Monitor the closing process and make sure thatthe closing path of the window is clear; other‐wise, injuries may result.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.The window closes while the switch is held.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistancepoint.The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion.Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via theremote control or the door lock.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value as awindow closes, the closing action is interrupted.The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Even with the pinch protection system, checkthat the window's closing path is clear; other‐wise, the closing action may not stop in certainsituations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

Window accessoriesDo not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, thepinch protection system will be impaired.◀

Closing without the pinch protectionsystemFor example, if there is an external danger or ifice on the windows prevents a window fromclosing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point andhold it there.Pinch protection is limited and the windowreopens slightly if the closing force exceedsa certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance pointagain within approx. 4 seconds and hold itthere.The window closes without pinch protec‐tion.

Seite 44


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Safety switchThe following functions can be locked simulta‐neously, using the switch:▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows

using the switches in the rear.▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds* using the

switches in the rear.▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats*.▷ Adjustment of the power head restraints* in

the rear.

Switching on and offPress the button.The LED lights up if the safety function

is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operationPress the safety switch when transporting

children in the rear; otherwise, injury may resultif the windows are closed without supervision.◀To deactivate the function, the vehicle must bein at least the radio ready state.

Roller sunblinds*General informationThe safety switch in the driver's door can beused to prevent children, for example, from op‐erating the roller blinds using the switches in therear.Press the safety switch in the driver's door. TheLED lights up if the safety function is switchedon.If you are no longer able to move the roller blindsafter having activated them consecutively anumber of times, the system is blocked for alimited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐tem cool.The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐terior temperatures.

Driver's door controls

Roller blinds for rear side windowsPress the button.

Rear door controls

Roller blind for the side windowsPress the button.

The roller blind can only be extended or re‐tracted when the side window is closed.

Raising and lowering the roller blindstogether

Press the button.

Panoramic glass sunroof*General informationThe glass sunroof and the sliding visor can beoperated together or separately, using the sameswitch.The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐tion is switched on.

Seite 45


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Danger of pinchingMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀


leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,cannot operate the roof and injure them‐selves.◀

Raising the glass sunroofPress the switch briefly.▷ The closed roof is raised and

the sliding visor opensslightly.

▷ The opened roof closes untilit is in its raised position. Thesliding visor stays completelyopen.Pressing the switch againcloses the sliding visor al‐most completely.

Sliding visor with raised roofDo not use force to close the sliding visor,

as this may damage the mechanism.◀

Opening/closing the sliding visor▷ Press the switch in the de‐

sired direction to the resist‐ance point and hold it there.The sliding visor moves whilethe switch is being held.

▷ Press the switch in the desired directionpast the resistance point.

The sliding visor moves automatically.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroofWhen the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐scribed under Sliding visor.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof andsliding visor together

Press the switch twice in the de‐sired direction past the resist‐ance point.The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐sor move together. Pressing the

switch again stops the motion.

Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via theremote control or the door lock.

Comfort positionIn the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐partment.Every time the glass sunroof is opened or closedcompletely, it stops in the comfort position. Ifdesired, continue the movement by pressing theswitch.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force when closing the glass sun‐roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ment is stopped, beginning at approximately themiddle of the opening in the roof, or from theraised position during closing.The glass sunroof opens again slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check thatthe roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, theclosing action may not be interrupted in certainextreme situations, such as when thin objectsare present.◀

Seite 46


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Closing without the pinch protectionsystemFor example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ance point and hold.Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐opens slightly if the closing force exceeds acertain value.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond theresistance point and hold until the roofcloses without pinch protection.

Initializing after a power failureAfter a power failure, it may only be possible tooperate the roof to a limited extent.Have the system initialized by your service cen‐ter.

Seite 47


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

AdjustingSitting safelyThe ideal seating position can make a vital con‐tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53.▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55.▷ Airbags, refer to page 90.

Front seatsAdjusting

Do not adjust the seat while drivingNever attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving.The seat could respond with unexpected move‐ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle controlcould lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to therear

Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐erwise, there is the danger of sliding under thesafety belt in an accident. This would eliminatethe protection normally provided by the belt.◀

At a glance: partially powered seats

1 Thigh support*2 Tilt3 Forward/backward

4 Lumbar support*5 Height6 Backrest

Adjustments in detail: partiallypowered seats

Forward/back:Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desireddirection.After releasing the lever, move the seat forwardor back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐erly.

Seat tilt:Pull the lever and move the seat to the desiredtilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weightto the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐gages properly.

Seite 48


Adju

stin

g

Height:Move the button in the required direction.

Backrest tilt:Move the button in the required direction.

At a glance: power* seats

1 Lumbar support*2 Backrest width*3 Shoulder support*4 Backrest5 Forward/back, height, tilt6 Thigh support*

Adjustments in detail: power* seats1. Forward/back.

2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

Seite 49


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

5. Thigh support*.

Lumbar support*The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐justed in such a way that it supports the lumbarregion of the spine. The lower back and thespine are supported for upright posture.

▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.The curvature is increased/decreased.

▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch.The curvature is shifted up/down.

Backrest width*

Change the width of the backrest using the sidewings to adjust the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

Shoulder support*

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Active seat*Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue tohelp prevent lower back pain.

Press the button. The LED lights up.

Seat heating*

Switching onPress the button once for each temper‐ature level.

Seite 50


Adju

stin

g

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.

Switching offPress the button longer.The LEDs go out.

Temperature distribution*The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐rest can be distributed in different ways.

1. "Climate"2. "Seat heating distribution"3. Select the required seat.

4. Turn the controller to set the temperaturedistribution.

Active seat ventilation*The seat surface is cooled by means of the in‐tegrated fan.The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if thevehicle interior is overheated or for continuouscooling at high temperatures.

Switching onPress the button once for each ventila‐tion level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs arelit.

After a short time, the system automaticallymoves down one level in order to prevent ex‐cessive cooling.


Rear seatsAdjusting

At a glance: manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward2 Backrest

Adjustments in detail: manuallyadjustable seats

Do not adjust the seat while drivingNever attempt to adjust the seat while

driving. Otherwise, the restraining effect of theseat can be limited in an accident.◀

Forward/back:

Seite 51


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desireddirection.After releasing the level, move the seat forwardor back slightly until it engages.

Backrest tilt:Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐rest or lift it off.

At a glance: power* seats

1 Forward/backward2 Shoulder support3 Backrest, head restraintThe seats cannot be adjusted if the safetyswitch for the power windows has beenpressed.

Adjustments in detail: power* seats1. Forward/back.

2. Backrest tilt.

3. Head restraint.

Shoulder support*

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.

Seite 52


Adju

stin

g

▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Reset* to standard position

Maintain pressure on the button until the systemcompletes the adjustment.

Seat heating*

Switching onPress the button once for each temper‐ature level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.


Temperature distributionThe heating action in the seat cushion and back‐rest can be distributed in different ways.

1. "Climate"2. "Seat heating rear"

3. Select the required seat.

4. Turn the controller to set the temperaturedistribution.

Active seat ventilation*

Switching onPress the button once for each ventila‐tion level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs arelit.


Safety beltsGeneral informationAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving away.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.

Seite 53


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Seats with safety beltThe vehicle has four or five* seating positions,each of which is equipped with a safety belt.▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be

correct for adult seat occupants of everybuild if the seat is correctly adjusted.

▷ The two rear safety belt buckles, integratedinto the rear seat, are for passengers sittingon the left and right.

▷ The belt buckle embossed with the wordCENTER is intended exclusively for use bypassengers riding in the center position.

One person per safety beltNever allow more than one person to wear

a single safety belt. Never allow infants or smallchildren to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the beltLay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to thebody as possible. Make sure that the belt lies lowaround the hips in the lap area and does notpress on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt canslip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐pact and injure the abdomen.The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rubon sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐ble objects, or be pinched.◀

Reduction of restraining effectAvoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulderbelt periodically to readjust the tension acrossyour lap; otherwise, the retention effect of thesafety belt may be reduced.◀

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in thebelt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt1. Hold the belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for driver's andfront passenger seat

The indicator lamp flashes or lights upand a signal sounds. Make sure that thesafety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder is active at speedsabove approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐senger seat.

Damage to safety beltsIn the case of strain caused by accidents ordamage:Have the safety belts, including the safety belttensioners, replaced and have the belt anchorschecked.

Checking and replacing safety beltsHave the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensuredthat this safety feature will function properly.◀

Seite 54


Adju

stin

g

Front head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event ofan accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐proximately at ear level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraint isas close as possible to the back of the head.

Active head restraintIn the event of a rear-end collision with a certainseverity, the active head restraint automaticallyreduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐

ers.▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

on the head restraints.▷ Do not attach accessories to the seat or

head restraint.Otherwise, the protective function of the activehead restraint will be impaired and the personalsafety of the occupants will be endangered.◀

Adjusting the height: manual headrestraints

▷ To raise: pull.▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the height: power* headrestraints

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to the back of the head:manual head restraints

▷ Forward: pull.▷ Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.

Seite 55


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Distance to the back of the head:power* head restraintsThe head restraint is automatically repositionedwhen the shoulder support is adjusted, refer topage 50.

Adjusting the side extensions*

Fold forward for increased lateral support in theresting position.

RemovingThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event ofan accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐proximately at ear level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraint isas close as possible to the back of the head.

Adjusting the height: manual headrestraints

▷ To raise: pull.▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the height: power* headrestraints

Move the switch in the desired direction.

Adjusting* the side sections

Fold the side extensions on the head restraintforward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ing position.

Removing: manual head restraintsOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

Seite 56


Adju

stin

g

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐sible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the headrestraint out completely.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

Removing: power* head restraintsFor technical reasons, the head restraint cannotbe removed.

Seat, mirror, and steeringwheel memory*General information

Front

Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, andsteering wheel positions can be stored and re‐trieved for each remote control. The adjustmentof the lumbar support is not stored.

Rear

Two different seat positions can be stored andretrieved.

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button on the door. TheLED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LEDgoes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally:

Press the button on the door again.The LED goes out.

Calling up settingsDo not retrieve the memory while drivingDo not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of the seator steering wheel could result in an accident.◀

Comfort function1. Open the driver's door.2. Switch off the ignition.3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.The corresponding seat position is performedautomatically.The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐

nition.

Seite 57


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 untilthe adjustment procedure is completed.

Calling up of a seat positiondeactivatedAfter a brief period, the calling up of stored seatpositions is deactivated to save battery power.To reactivate calling up of a seat position:▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.▷ Press a button on the remote control.▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

Calling up with the remote controlThe driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steeringwheel position selected last is stored for thecurrently used remote control.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seatIf this function is used, first make sure that

the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.Otherwise, people can be injured or objectsdamaged when the seat is moved back.◀The adjustment procedure is interrupted:▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.▷ When a memory button is touched.1. "Settings"2. "Door locks"3. "Last seat position auto."

MirrorsExterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is more curvedthan the driver's mirror.

Estimating distances correctlyObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distanceto the traffic behind you based on what you seein the mirror, as this will increase your risk of anaccident.◀

At a glance

1 Adjusting2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor*3 Fold in and out*

Selecting a mirrorTo change over to the other mirror:Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the directionin which the button is pressed.

Saving positions*Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, referto page 57.

Adjusting manuallyIf an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,press the edges of the mirror glass.

Seite 58


Adju

stin

g

Automatic Curb Monitor*When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirrorglass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐senger side. This improves your view of the curband other low-lying obstacles when parking, forexample.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switchto the driver's mirror position.

2. Engage transmission position R.

DeactivatingSlide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐senger's mirror position.

Fold in and outPress the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.For example, this is advantageous▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually.Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car washBefore entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with thebutton; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐pending on the width of the vehicle.◀

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automatically heatedwhenever the engine is running.

Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect

From behind when driving at night: turn theknob.

Interior rearview mirror, automaticdimming feature*

Photocells are used for control:▷ In the mirror glass.▷ On the back of the mirror.For proper operation:▷ Keep the photocells clean.▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheelGeneral information

Adjusting while drivingDo not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movementcould result in an accident.◀

Seite 59


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Manual steering wheel adjustment

1. Fold the lever down.2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi‐tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Power* steering wheel adjustment

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐rections.

Storing the positionSeat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, referto page 57.

Steering wheel heating*

Switching on/offPress the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 60


Adju

stin

g

Transporting children safelyThe right place for childrenNote

Children in the vehicleDo not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐selves and other persons, e.g., by opening thedoors.◀

Children should always be in the rearAccident research shows that the safest placefor children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rearOnly transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in therear in child restraint fixing systems provided inaccordance with the age, weight and size of thechild; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐jury in an accident.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintfixing system can no longer be used, due to theirage, weight and size.◀

Children on the front passenger seatShould it ever be necessary to use a child re‐straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,make sure that the front, knee and side airbagson the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,refer to page 91.

Deactivating the front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there isan increased risk of injury to the child when theairbags are triggered, even with a child restraintfixing system.◀

Installing child restraint fixingsystemsBefore mountingBefore mounting a child restraint fixing systemon the rear middle seat, return both outer backr‐ests to the basic position.

NotesManufacturer's information for child re‐straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixingsystems, observe the information provided bythe system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐tective effect can be impaired.◀

In the front passenger seatAfter installing a child restraint fixing system inthe front passenger seat, make sure that thefront, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐senger side are deactivated.

Deactivating the front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there isan increased risk of injury to the child when theairbags are triggered, even with a child restraintfixing system.◀

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint fixing system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the middle po‐sition to obtain the best possible position for thebelt and to offer optimal protection in the eventof an accident.Do not change the seat position and height afterthis.

Backrest width*Before installing a child restraint fixing system inthe front passenger seat, open the backrest

Seite 61


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

width, refer to page 50, completely. Do notchange the backrest width again and do not callup a memory position.

Backrest width for the child seatBefore installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the backrestwidth must be opened completely. Do notchange the adjustment after this; otherwise, thestability of the child seat will be reduced.◀

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passengersafety belt can be locked against pulling out formounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixingsystem. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixingsystemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐dren.

NoteManufacturer's information for LATCHchild restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐ing systems, observe the operating and safetyinformation from the system manufacturer; oth‐erwise, the level of protection may be re‐duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsCorrectly engage the lower LATCH an‐chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors haveproperly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐ing system is resting snugly against the back‐rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offeredmay be reduced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐cated behind the seat cover between the back‐rest and the seat cushion at the marked loca‐tions.

Exposing the lower LATCH anchors

1. Reach between the seat cushion and thebackrest.

2. Detach the seat cover from the Velcro® fas‐tener.

Seite 62


Tran

spor

ting

child

ren

safe

ly

3. Pull the seat cover forward.Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐straint fixing system.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixingsystems without power rear seats1. Move the seat to its rearmost position.2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest

back slightly.3. Fold the leather cover on the seat forward.4. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer

to the operating instructions of the system.5. Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors

have properly engaged and that the child re‐straint fixing system is resting snuglyagainst the backrest.

6. After mounting the system, move the back‐rest back up slightly so that the child re‐straint fixing system rests against the back‐rest.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixingsystems on power rear seats*1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their

basic position, refer to page 53.2. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer

to the operating instructions of the system.3. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing systems with atether strap

Mounting points

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there aretwo outer or three mounting points for child re‐straint fixing systems with a tether strap.Fold up the middle mounting point.

LATCH mounting eyesOnly use the mounting eyes for the upper

LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraintfixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyescould be damaged.◀

Retaining strap guideRetaining strapMake sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as itpasses to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strapwill not properly secure the child restraint fixingsystem in the event of an accident.◀

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint.3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point/eye

Seite 63


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

5 Seat backrest6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Raise the head restraint.2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the

supports of the head restraint.3. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the

mounting eyes.4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.5. Lower the head restraint.

Locking the doors andwindowsRear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.The door can now be opened from the outsideonly.

Safety switch for the rearPress the button on the driver's door ifchildren are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannotbe operated from the rear: safety switch, refer topage 45.

Seite 64


Tran

spor

ting

child

ren

safe

ly

DrivingStart/Stop buttonThe concept

Pressing the Start/Stop buttonswitches the ignition on or off andstarts the engine.The engine starts if the brakepedal is pressed when you press

the Start/Stop button.

Ignition onPress the Start/Stop button and do not press onthe brake pedal at the same time.All vehicle systems are ready for operation.Most of the indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster light up for varying lengths oftime.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.The ignition switches off automatically:▷ During locking when the low beams are

switched on.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted.

▷ When the engine is switched off and the ig‐nition is switched on, the system automati‐cally switches to radio ready state when thedoor is opened, if the light is switched off orthe daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition offPress the Start/Stop button again and do notpress on the brake pedal at the same time.All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

Transmission position P with the ignitionoff

When the ignition is switched off, position P isengaged automatically. When in an automaticcar wash, for example, ensure that the ignition isnot switched off accidentally.◀When the vehicle is locked using the centrallocking system, the ignition switches off auto‐matically.

Radio ready stateThis state can only be reached by pressing theStart/Stop button briefly to switch off the enginewhile it is running.Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐main ready for operation.Radio ready state switches off automatically:▷ After approx. 8 minutes.▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central

locking system.

Starting the engineGeneral information

Enclosed areasDo not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumesmay lead to loss of consciousness and death.The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, anodorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicleDo not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐tial source of danger.Before leaving the car with the engine running,set the parking brake and place the transmissionin position P or neutral to prevent the car frommoving.◀

Frequent starting in quick succession

Seite 65


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the carand avoid starting the car frequently in quicksuccession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned oris inadequately burned, and there is the dangerof overheating and damaging the catalytic con‐verter.◀Do not wait for the engine to warm up while thevehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐erate engine speeds.

Starting the enginePress on the brake pedal andpress the Start/Stop button.The engine is cranked until itstarts.

Engine stopGeneral information


leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,cannot operate the windows and injure them‐selves.◀

Set the parking brake and further securethe vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upwardand downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel inthe direction of the curb. ◀

Switching off the engine1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐

hicle stopped.2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Before driving into a car washThe vehicle is able to roll when the followingsteps are adhered to:

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Engage transmission position N.3. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐

tomatic Hold, refer to page 68.4. Switch the engine off.

Transmission position P with the ignitionoff

When the ignition is switched off, position P isengaged automatically. When in an automaticcar wash, for example, ensure that the ignition isnot switched off accidentally.◀Transmission position P is engaged automati‐cally:▷ When the ignition is switched off.▷ After approx. 15 minutes if the vehicle is not

moved.

Parking brakeThe conceptThe parking brake is used to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling when it is parked.▷ Engine switched off: the parking brake acts

on the rear wheels.▷ Engine running: the parking brake acts on

the disc brakes of the front and rear wheelsvia the hydraulic brake system.

The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐matically:▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold, re‐

fer to page 68.

Seite 66


Drivi

ng

SettingPull the switch.The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up in red. Theparking brake is set.Indicator lamp in Canadian models

While drivingUse while driving:Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakeshard while the button is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.Indicator lamp in Canadian models

If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.

ReleasingPress the switch while the brake pedal ispressed or transmission position P is en‐

gaged.The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released.


leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,cannot release the parking brake.◀

Manual releaseThe parking brake can be released manually inthe event of a power failure or electrical fault.

Before releasing, secure the vehicleagainst rolling

Before releasing the parking brake manually,and whenever you park the vehicle with theparking brake released, ensure that position P ofthe automatic transmission is engaged.Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate tothe inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheelchock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve‐hicle rolling.◀

If it also becomes necessary to release thetransmission lock of the automatic transmissionmanually, follow this sequence:

1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.2. Manually release the parking brake.

Unlocking1. Raise the rear floor cover in the trunk, ar‐

row 1, and fasten it with a retaining strap.

2. Remove the release tool from the tool kit.

3. Take out the floor trim in the trunk, removingthe clips with a screw driver, arrows.

Seite 67


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

4. Hook the release tool into the release point,arrow.

5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against theresistance until you notice a marked in‐crease in the resistance and the parkingbrake releases audibly.

Have the malfunction correctedIf the parking brake has been released

manually in response to a malfunction, onlytechnicians can return it to operation.Have the malfunction corrected by your servicecenter.◀

After a power failureOnly put the parking brake into operationafter a power failure

The parking brake should only be put into oper‐ation again if it was manually released due to aninterruption in the supply of electrical power.Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parkingbrake will function properly.◀

Putting the parking brake intooperation1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch with the brake de‐pressed or transmission position P en‐gaged.

It may take several seconds for the brake to beput into operation. Any sounds associated withthis are normal.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out as soon as the parkingbrake is ready for operation.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models

Automatic Hold

The conceptThis system assists the driver by automaticallysetting and releasing the parking brake, such aswhen moving in stop-and-go traffic.The vehicle is automatically held in place whenit is stationary.On inclines, the system prevents the vehiclefrom rolling backward when driving away.

For your safetyAutomatic Hold is deactivated automatically andthe parking brake is set when:▷ The engine is switched off.▷ A door is opened and the driver's safety belt

is unbuckled.▷ The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the

parking brake while driving.

Seite 68


Drivi

ng

The indicator lamp switches from greento red and the letters AUTO H go out.Indicator lamp in Canadian models

Before driving away:▷ Release the parking brake manually.▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.

Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀

ActivatingPress the button.The LED and the letters AUTO H light

up.

The indicator lamp lights up.Automatic Hold is activated.

DeactivatingPress the button again.The LED and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.When the parking brake, refer to page 66, is setmanually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐matically.

DrivingAutomatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐matically secured against rolling when it stops.

The indicator lamp lights up in green.Press on the accelerator to drive away.The brake is released automatically.The indicator lamp goes out.Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian

models

Before driving into a car washDeactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the

parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able toroll.◀

ParkingThe parking brake is automatically set if the en‐gine is switched off while the vehicle is beingheld by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from greento red.The parking brake is not set if the engineis switched off while the vehicle is coast‐ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐vated.The parking brake can also be releasedafter the engine is switched off, e.g., in a

car wash.


leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,cannot release the parking brake.◀

MalfunctionIn the event of a failure or malfunction of theparking brake, secure the vehicle against rollingusing a wheel chock, for example, when leavingit.

Seite 69


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Turn signal, high beams,headlamp flasherTurn signal

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐sistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever to the resistance point.The turn signal flashes three times.The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Triple turn signal"

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signal toflash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

▷ High beams, arrow 1.▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper systemSwitching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozenDo not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐

zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiperblades and the windshield wiper motor may bedamaged.◀

Switching on

Press the wiper levers up.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operationwhen the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or pressonce beyond the resistance point.The wipers switch to normal speed when thevehicle is stationary.

Seite 70


Drivi

ng

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Brief wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Rain sensorThe time between wipes is controlled automat‐ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.The sensor is located on the windshield, directlyin front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor

Press the button on the wiper lever.When activated, the wipers move over the wind‐shield once.The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washesDeactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐tion.◀

Rain sensor sensitivity

Turn the thumb wheel.

Washing the windshield, headlamps

Pull the lever.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regularintervals when the vehicle lights are switchedon.

Do not use the washer system at freezingtemperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any dangerthat the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐erwise, your vision could be obscured. For thisreason, use antifreeze.Avoid using the washer when the reservoir isempty; otherwise, you could damage thepump.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heated*whenever the ignition is switched on.

Seite 71


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Fold-out position of the wipersRequired when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch off the ignition.2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point ofresistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,until the wiper remains in a nearly verticalposition.

After the wipers are folded back down, the wipersystem, refer to page 70, must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back downBefore switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,the wipers may become damaged when they areswitched on.◀1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and are readyfor operation.

Washer fluidGeneral information

Antifreeze for washer fluidAntifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep

it away from sources of ignition.Only keep it in the closed original container andinaccessible to children.Follow the instructions on the container.◀

Container for washer fluidAdding washer fluidOnly add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely toavoid contact between the washer fluid and hotengine parts.Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a riskto personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐voir.Fill with water and – if required – with a washerantifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐ommendations.Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintainthe correct mixing ratio.

Capacityapprox. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters

Automatic transmission withSteptronicTransmission positions

D Drive, automatic positionPosition for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ward gears are available.

R is ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is NeutralUse in automatic car washes, for example. Thevehicle can roll.When the ignition is switched off, refer topage 65, position P is engaged automatically.

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thedrive wheels are blocked.P is engaged automatically:▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is

in radio ready state, refer to page 65, or if the

Seite 72


Drivi

ng

ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, andif position R or D is engaged.

▷ If the ignition is switched off and position Nis engaged.

▷ If the vehicle is standing with position R or Dengaged and you unfasten the belt of thedriver's seat and open the driver's door.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Press on the accelerator beyondthe resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging the transmission position▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐

gaged if the engine is running and the brakepedal is pressed.

▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on thebrake pedal before shifting out of P or N;otherwise, the shift command will not beexecuted: shift lock.

Depress the brake until you start driv‐ing

To prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a driving position, maintain pres‐sure on the brake pedal until you are readyto start.◀

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.After releasing the selector lever, it returns to itscenter position.

Press the Unlock button to:▷ Engage R.▷ Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the sport program

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐mission position D.DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.This position is recommended for a perform‐ance-oriented driving style.

Seite 73


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Activating the M/S manual modePush the selector lever to the left out of trans‐mission position D.Push the selector lever forward or backward.Manual mode becomes active and the gear ischanged.The engaged gear is displayed in the instrumentcluster, e.g., M1.▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐

ward.The transmission only shifts up or down if therpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If theengine speed is too high, the transmission doesnot shift down.The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument panel, followed by the current gear.

Ending the sport program/manualmodePush the selector lever to the right.D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe transmission position is dis‐played, e.g., P.

Seite 74


Drivi

ng

DisplaysInstrument clusterAt a glance

1 Fuel gauge2 Speedometer3 Indicator/warning lamps4 Tachometer5 Oil temperature

6 External temperature*7 Electronic displays8 Miles, trip miles9 Clock*10 Display/reset miles

Odometer and trip odometer▷ Odometer, arrow 1.▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Press the knob.▷ When the ignition is switched

off, the time, external temper‐ature and odometer are dis‐played.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the tripodometer is reset.

External temperature

External temperature warningIf the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.A message is displayed in the in‐strument cluster.There is the increased danger of

ice.

Ice on roadsEven at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,

there can be a risk of ice on roads.

Seite 75


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shadyroads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐ger of an accident.◀

TimeThe time is displayed at the bot‐tom of the instrument cluster.Setting the time and time format,refer to page 80.

DateThe date is displayed in the in‐strument cluster.Setting the date and date format,refer to page 80.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warningfield. In this range, the fuel supply is interruptedto protect the engine.

Coolant temperatureShould the coolant, and with it the engine, be‐come too hot, a warning message is displayed.Check the coolant level, refer to page 237.

Engine oil temperature

▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐perature end. Drive at moderate engine andvehicle speeds.

▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointeris in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐perature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐diately and allow it to cool down.

Check the oil level, refer to page 236.

Current fuel consumptionDisplays the current fuel con‐sumption. You can checkwhether you are currently drivingin an efficient and environmen‐tally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuelconsumption1. "Settings"2. "Info display"3. "Additional indicators"

The bar display for the current fuel consumptionis displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 76


Disp

lays

Energy regenerationThe energy of motion of the ve‐hicle is converted to electrical en‐ergy while coasting, refer topage 151. The vehicle battery ispartially charged and fuel con‐sumption can be lowered.

Fuel gauge

Gasoline engine:Fuel capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 litersThe vehicle inclination may cause the display tovary.Notes on refueling, refer to page 224.

RangeAfter the reserve range isreached:▷ A message appears briefly.▷ The remaining range is

shown on the computer.The message appears continuously below arange of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range 30 miles/

50 km, or engine functions are not ensured anddamage may occur.◀

Displaying the cruising range1. "Settings"2. "Info display"

3. "Additional indicators"

The bar display for the cruising range is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Selection lists in theinstrument clusterThe concept

The following functions can be operated usingthe buttons and the thumb wheel on the steeringwheel and the display in the instrument cluster:▷ Current audio source.▷ Redial on telephone*.▷ Activation of the voice activation system*.

Seite 77


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Activating a list and creating thesetting

Press a button on the right side of the steeringwheel or turn the thumb wheel to activate therequired list.Create the setting using the thumb wheel.

ComputerCalling up information on the infodisplay

Press the computer button on the turn signallever.Information is displayed on the info display of theinstrument cluster.

Information at a glanceRepeatedly pressing the buttonon the turn signal lever displaysthe information on the info dis‐play in the following order:▷ Range.

▷ Average fuel consumption.▷ Average speed.▷ Date*.

▷ Speed Limit Display*.▷ Time of arrival*

After entering the distance or when desti‐nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐tion system.

▷ Distance to destination*After entering the distance or when desti‐nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐tion system.

▷ Arrow view of navigation system*When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

Adjusting the info displayYou can select what information from the com‐puter is to be displayed on the info display of theinstrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Info display"3. Select the desired displays.

Speed limitDisplay of a speed limit which, when reached,should cause a warning to be issued.Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing thelimit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"

Seite 78


Disp

lays

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit isdisplayed.

5. Press the controller.The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning"4. Press the controller.

Applying your current speed as thelimit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Select current speed"4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as thelimit.

Resetting valuesThe average fuel consumption and averagespeed can be reset.Press and hold the computer button on the turnsignal lever.

Trip computerThere are two types of computer.▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary.▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐

view of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Trip computer"

3. "Reset": all values are reset."Automatically reset": all values are resetapprox. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to astandstill.

Display on the Control DisplayDisplay the computer or trip computer on theControl Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption andspeed1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Onboard info"

Seite 79


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

3. "Cons." or "Speed"

4. "Yes"

Settings on the ControlDisplayTime

Setting the time1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hoursare displayed.


6. Turn the controller until the desired minutesare displayed.

7. Press the controller.The time is stored.

Setting the time format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The time format is stored.

Date

Setting the date1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Date:"4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed.5. Press the controller.6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year.The date is stored.

Setting the date format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Seite 80


Disp

lays

Language

Setting the languageTo set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Setting the voice dialogTo switch between a standard dialog and a shortdialog.

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialog.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measureTo set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐tance and temperature:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightnessTo set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"

Seite 81


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ness is set.

5. Press the controller.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ness control may not be clearly visible.

Service requirementsDisplay

The driving distance or the timeto the next service is displayedbriefly after the ignition isswitched on.The current service require‐

ments can be read out from the remote controlby the service specialist.Data regarding the maintenance status or legallymandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐matically transmitted to your service center be‐fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐quest, refer to page 217.

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the scope of service re‐quired can be displayed on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"Required maintenance procedures and le‐gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a le‐gally mandated inspection isapproaching. Please make aservice appointment.

The service deadline has al‐ready passed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the required inspections.Ensure that the vehicle date and time are setcorrectly.

1. "Vehicle Info"

Seite 82


Disp

lays

2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"

4. "§ Vehicle inspection"5. "Date:"6. Create the settings.7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service RequestData regarding the maintenance status or legallymandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐matically transmitted to your service center be‐fore a service due date.You can check when your service center wasnotified.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. Open "Options".4. "Last Service Request"

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control system monitors functionsin the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions inthe monitored systems.A Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lamps andtext messages in the instrument cluster and inthe Head-up Display*.In addition, an acoustic signal may be output anda text message may appear on the Control Dis‐play.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.Several of the lamps are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Text messagesText messages in combination with a symbol inthe instrument cluster explain a Check Controlmessage and the meaning of the indicator andwarning lamps.

Supplementary text messagesAdditional information on the Control Display,e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐trol.The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐matically.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the computer button on the turn signallever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐played continuously and are not cleared un‐til the malfunction is eliminated. If several

Seite 83


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

malfunctions occur at once, the messagesare displayed consecutively.These messages can be hidden for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are hiddenautomatically after approx. 20 seconds.They are stored and can be displayed againlater.

Displaying stored Check Controlmessages1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completionMalfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐played again after the ignition is switched off.

Speed limit detection*The conceptSpeed limit detection shows the current maxi‐mum allowable speed in the instrument cluster.The camera at the base of the interior rearviewmirror monitors traffic signs at the edge of theroad and uses the information from the naviga‐tion system.In this way, the allowable speed is displayedeven in the absence of traffic signs, such aswithin town limits.

Personal judgment

The system cannot serve as a substitute for thedriver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐tion.Speed limit detection assists the driver and doesnot replace the human eye.◀

Switching on/off1. "Settings"2. "Info display"3. "Speed limit information"

If speed limit detection is switched on, it can bedisplayed on the info display in the instrumentcluster via the computer.

DisplayThe following is displayed in theinstrument cluster:▷ Current speed limit.▷ No speed limit - for the Ger‐

man autobahn.▷ Speed limit detection is not available.Information regarding speed limit detection canalso be displayed in the Head-up Display, referto page 126.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional and mayprovide incorrect information in the followingsituations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ When signs are concealed by objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.

Seite 84


Disp

lays

▷ When the windshield is fogged over, dirty orcovered by a sticker, etc., in front of the in‐terior rearview mirror.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation, e.g.due to changes in the road network.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speedsticker.

Camera

The camera is located on the front of the interiorrearview mirror.Keep the area in front of the interior rearviewmirror clear.

Seite 85


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

LampsAt a glance

1 Rear fog lamps*2 Front fog lamps3 Automatic headlamp control/adaptive light

control*/High-beam Assistant*/welcomelamps

4 Lamps off/daytime running lights*5 Parking lamps6 Low beams/welcome lamps7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps/low beams,headlamp controlParking lampsSwitch position : the vehicle lamps lightup on all sides, e.g., for parking.Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐charged and it would then be impossible to startthe engine.When parking, it is preferable to switch on theone-sided roadside parking lamps, refer topage 87.

Low beamsSwitch position with the ignition switchedon: the low beams light up.

Welcome lampsWhen parking the vehicle, leave the switch inposition or : the parking and interiorlamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐locked.

Activating/deactivating the welcomelamps1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Welcome light"


Headlamp courtesy delay featureThe low beams stay lit for a short while after theignition is switched off, if the lamps are switchedoff and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Pathway light.: s"

Seite 86


Lam

ps

4. Set the duration.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Automatic headlamp controlSwitch position : the low beams are switchedon and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐light or if there is precipitation. The indicatorlamp in the instrument cluster lights up.A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.The low beams always stay on when the foglamps are switched on.

Personal responsibilityThe automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judgmentin determining when the lamps should beswitched on in response to ambient lightingconditions.For example, the sensors are unable to detectfog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, youshould always switch on the lamps manually un‐der these conditions.◀

Daytime running lights*The daytime running lights light up in posi‐tion 0, and . After the ignition isswitched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐tion .

Activating/deactivating1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Daytime running lamps"


Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching onWith the ignition switched off, press the levereither up or down past the resistance point forapprox. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistance point inthe opposite direction.

Adaptive light control*The conceptAdaptive light control is a variable headlampcontrol system that enables dynamic illumina‐tion of the road surface.Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐rameters, the light from the headlamp followsthe course of the road.In tight curves, such as on mountainous roadsor when turning, turning lamps that light up theinside area of the curve are switched on atspeeds up to approx. 70 km/h, approx. 44 mph.

Controls

ActivatingSwitch position with the ignition switchedon.

Seite 87


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

The turning lamps are automatically switchedon depending on the steering angle or the useof turn signals.To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptivelight control directs light towards the front pas‐senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp isactive and illuminates the outside of the curve.

Self-leveling headlightsThe self-leveling headlights feature adapts thelight distribution to the contours of the road.The light distribution is lowered on hilltops toavoid blinding oncoming traffic and raised in de‐pressions to increase visibility.

MalfunctionA message is displayed.Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or hasfailed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐sible.

High-beam assistant*The conceptWhen the lights are switched on, this systemautomatically switches the high beams on andoff. The procedure is controlled by a sensor onthe front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐sistant ensures that the high beams areswitched on whenever the traffic situation al‐lows. The driver can intervene at any time andswitch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the high-beam assistant

1. Turn the light switch to or .2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐

row.The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.When the lights are switched on, the

high beams are switched on and off automati‐cally.The system responds to light from oncomingtraffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

Switching the high beams on and offmanually

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.To reactivate the high-beam assistant, press thebutton on the turn signal lever.

System limitsPersonal responsibilityThe high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver's personal judgmentof when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐ually switch off the high beams in situationswhere this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀The system is not fully functional in situationssuch as the following, and driver interventionmay be necessary:▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders andwagons; when driving close to train or shiptraffic; and at animal crossings.

Seite 88


Lam

ps

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,in cross traffic or half-obscured oncomingtraffic on freeways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐ence of highly reflective signs.

▷ At low speeds.▷ When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

Camera


Fog lampsFront fog lamps*The parking lamps or low beams must beswitched on.

Press the button. The green indicatorlamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer topage 87, is activated, the low beams will comeon automatically when you switch on the frontfog lamps.

Cornering lamp*In the switch position, a cornering lamp isswitched on for a broader light distribution atspeeds up to 68 mph/110 km/h.

Instrument lightingAdjusting

The parking lamps or low beamsmust be switched on to adjust thebrightness.Adjust the brightness using thethumb wheel.

Interior lampsGeneral informationThe interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lampsand courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐cally.The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐enced by the thumb wheel for the instrumentlighting.

1 Interior lamps2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lamps on and offPress the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button forapprox. 3 seconds.To clear this setting: press the button.

Reading lampsPress the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rearnext to the interior lamps.

Seite 89


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

SafetyAirbags

1 Front airbag, driver2 Front airbag, front passenger3 Head airbags

4 Side airbag5 Knee airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐quate restraint.

Side airbagsIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports thebody on the side in the chest area.

Head airbagsIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supports thehead.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag protects the legs during a fron‐tal collision.

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-endcollisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimalprotective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keepthe danger of injury to your hands or arms aslow as possible if the airbag is triggered.

▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

Seite 90


Safe

ty

▷ Keep the dashboard and window on thefront passenger side clear, i.e., do not coverwith adhesive labels or coverings, and do notattach holders such as for navigation instru‐ments and mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sittingcorrectly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legsin the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries canoccur if the front airbag is triggered.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions orother objects on the front passenger seatthat are not approved specifically for seatswith integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their headsaway from the side airbag and do not restagainst the head airbag; otherwise, injuriescan occur if the airbags are triggered.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, cover them or modifythem in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system. Thisalso applies to steering wheel covers, thedashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and thesides of the headliner.◀

Even when all instructions are followed closely,injury from contact with the airbags cannot beruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivationand after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of burns.Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐mantled and the airbag generator scrapped byyour service center or a workshop that has thenecessary authorization for handling explosives.

Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐desired triggering of the airbag, either of whichcould result in injury.◀Warnings and information on the airbags arealso found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the frontpassenger airbagsThe system determines whether the front pas‐senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐sistance of the human body.The front, knee, and side airbag on the frontpassenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐cordingly.

Leave feet in the footwellMake sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the frontpassenger airbags may not function properly.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the frontpassenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ger seat, see the safety notes and instructionsunder Children on the front passenger seat.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults, thefront passenger airbags may be deactivated incertain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lightsup.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front passenger airbags are activated andthe indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To make sure that the occupied seat cushioncan be evaluated correctly▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or

other items to the front passenger seat un‐less they are specifically recommended bythe manufacturer of your vehicle.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

Seite 91


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Indicator lamp for the front passengerairbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags indicates the operating state of the frontpassenger airbags.The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐tivated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child who is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system intended for thatpurpose is detected on theseat or the seat is empty. Theairbags on the front passen‐ger side are not activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,for example, a correctly seated person ofsufficient size is detected on the seat. Theairbags on the front passenger side are ac‐tivated.

Most child seats are detected by the system,especially the child seats required by theNHTSA at the time the vehicle was manufac‐tured. After installing a child seat, make sure thatthe indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags lights up. This indicates that the child seathas been detected and the front passenger air‐bags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and frontpassenger airbagThe strength with which the driver's and frontpassenger airbags are triggered depends on theposition of the driver's and front passengerseats.To maintain the accuracy of this function overthe long-term, calibrate the front seats when a

corresponding message appears on the ControlDisplay.

Calibrating the front seatsA corresponding message appears on the Con‐trol Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all theway.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. Itmoves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.The calibration procedure is completed whenthe message on the Control Display disappears.If the message continues to be displayed, repeatthe calibration.If the message does not disappear after a repeatcalibration, have the system checked as soon aspossible.

Unobstructed area of movementEnsure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury ordamage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*The conceptMonitoring of the tire inflation pressure in thefour mounted tires. The system notifies you ifthere is a significant loss of pressure in one ormore tires.

Conditions for operationThe system must have been reset when the in‐flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliablesignaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always usewheels with TPM electronics to ensure that thesystem will operate properly. Reset the systemafter each correction of the tire inflation pres‐sure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limitsSudden tire damage

Seite 92


Safe

ty

Sudden serious tire damage caused by externalinfluences cannot be indicated in advance.◀The system does not operate correctly if it hasnot been reset. For example, a flat tire may beindicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐sures.The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flattire:▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐

ics.▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐

tems or devices with the same radio fre‐quency.

Status displayThe tire and system status is indicated by thecolor of the tires.A change in the tire inflation pressure duringdriving is taken into account.A correction is only necessary if indicated byTPM.

GreenThe tire inflation pressure is equal to the targetstate.

One wheel is yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inthe indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure

in several tires.▷ The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus warns based on the infla‐tion pressures initialized last.

GrayThe system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons forthis may be:▷ TPM is being reset.▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the

same radio frequency.▷ Malfunction.

Resetting the systemReset the system after each correction of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Reset TPM"

4. Start the engine - do not drive away.5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".6. Drive away.The tires are shown in gray and "ResettingTPM..." is displayed.After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐setting process is completed automatically dur‐ing driving. The tires are shown in green and"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.The trip can be interrupted at any time. If youdrive away again, the process resumes auto‐matically.If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires aredisplayed in yellow.

Low tire pressure messageThe yellow warning lamp lights up. Amessage appears on the Control Dis‐play. In addition, a signal sounds.

▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐flation pressure.

▷ The system was not reset after a wheelchange and thus warns based on the infla‐tion pressures initialized last.

Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 93


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

Continued driving with a flat tirePossible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:▷ With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐

gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km.▷ With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or

4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/80 km.

▷ With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx.30 miles/50 km.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steering prop‐erties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speedand stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire couldcome loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀

Message when not resetThe yellow warning lamp lights up. Amessage appears on the Control Dis‐play.

The system was not reset, e.g., after a wheelchange.Check the tire inflation pressure and reset thesystem.

Status displayThe current status of the Tire Pressure MonitorTPM can be displayed on the Control Display,e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The status is displayed.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning lamp flashes andthen lights up continuously. The tires aredisplayed in gray on the Control Display.

No flat tire can be detected.Display in the following situations:▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if necessary.▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the

same radio frequency: after leaving the areaof the disturbance, the system automaticallybecomes active again.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐luminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-in‐flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

Seite 94


Safe

ty

and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stoppingability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not operating prop‐erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐bined with the low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately one minute and then re‐main continuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐function indicator is illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tire pressureas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐placement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor*The conceptThe system detects a pressure loss on the basisof speed differences between the individualwheels while driving.In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter andtherefore the rotational speed of the corre‐sponding wheel change. This is detected andreported as a flat tire.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized when thetire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐itialize the system after each correction of the

tire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.

System limitsSudden tire damageSudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐vance.◀A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐not be detected.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration.▷ When driving with snow chains*.

InitializationThe initialization process adopts the set inflationtire pressures as reference values for the detec‐tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐firming the inflation pressures.Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains*.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive away.5. Start the initialization with "Reset".6. Drive away.The initialization is completed while driving,which can be interrupted at any time.

Seite 95


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

The initialization automatically continues whendriving resumes.

Indication of a flat tireThe yellow warning lamp and the vehiclesymbol light up. A message appears onthe Control Display. In addition, a signal

sounds.There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflationpressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐ular tires* or run-flat tires*.Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐bol containing the letters RSC marked onthe tire sidewall.

Normal tires*1. Identify the damaged wheel.

If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at thenext opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.

Run-flat tires*1. Carefully reduce your speed to a maximum

of 50 mph/80 km/h.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued driv‐ing may result in serious accidents.◀

2. Repair the puncture.

Continued driving with a flat tirePossible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:▷ With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐

gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km.▷ With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or

4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/80 km.

▷ With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx.30 miles/50 km.

If there is minor tire damage, especially on thetire tread, the distance that you can travel withthe damaged tire can be extended.After notification, inflate the damaged tire to amaximum of 3.5 bar at the next opportunity.Do not reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. The ex‐isting flat tire notification will continue to act asa reminder of the defective tire. The procedurecan be repeated several times.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steering prop‐erties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speedand stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire couldcome loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀

Status displayThe current status of the Flat Tire Monitor canbe displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 96


Safe

ty

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Lane departure warning*The conceptThis system issues a warning at speeds aboveapprox. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is aboutto leave the lane on roads with lane lines.The steering wheel begins vibrating gently.The system does not provide a warning if theturn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The system can issue warnings at speeds aboveapprox. 40 mph/65 km/h.The state is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Display

▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated.▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane line was

detected and warnings can be issued.

Issued warningIf you leave the lane and if a lane line has beendetected, the steering wheel begins vibrating.If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,a warning is not issued.

End of warningThe warning ends:▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.▷ When returning to your own lane.▷ When braking hard.▷ When using the turn signal.

System limitsPersonal responsibilityThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the courseof the road and the traffic situation.In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steeringwheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀The system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,

diverging, or multiple lines such as in con‐struction areas.

▷ When lane lines are covered in snow, ice, dirtor water.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

Seite 97


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

▷ When the lines are covered by objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibrationFrequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐tion causes the system to overheat.This causes the lane departure warning to be‐come deactivated.Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressingthe button.

Camera


Active Blind Spot Detection*The concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐itor the area behind and next to the vehicle atspeeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.The system indicates whether there are vehiclesin the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching frombehind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights updimly.

Before you change lanes after setting the turnsignal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐tions described above.The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirrorflashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The system can issue warnings at speeds aboveapprox. 30 mph/50 km/h.The state is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Seite 98


Safe

ty

Display

Information stageThe dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐cates when there are vehicles in the blind spotor approaching from behind.

WarningIf the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in thecritical zone, the steering wheel vibrates brieflyand the lamp in the mirror housing flashesbrightly.The warning stops when the turn signal isswitched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐ical zone.

System limitsPersonal responsibilityThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the trafficsituation.In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steeringwheel, as you may lose control over the vehi‐cle.◀The function may be limited in the following sit‐uations:▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibrationFrequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐tion causes the system to overheat.

This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be‐come deactivated.Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressingthe button.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rearbumper.The system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ Dirty or icy bumper.▷ Stickers on the bumper.A message is displayed when the system is notfully functional.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is governedby the following:FCC ID:▷ NBG009014A.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐




Seite 99


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Brake force display*The concept

▷ During normal brake application, the outerbrake lamps light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the innerbrake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 100


Safe

ty

Driving stability control systemsAntilock Brake System ABSABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ing.The vehicle remains steerable even during fullbrake applications, thus increasing activesafety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Brake assistantWhen you apply the brakes rapidly, this systemautomatically produces the maximum brakingforce boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortestpossible braking distance during full braking.This system utilizes all of the benefits providedby ABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of the full braking.

Adaptive brake assistantIn combination with the Active Cruise Control,this system ensures that the brakes respondeven more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer topage 112.

DSC Dynamic StabilityControlThe conceptDSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheelswhen driving away and accelerating.DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subjectto physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicleon a steady course by reducing engine speedand by applying brakes at individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situationAn appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.The laws of physics cannot be repealed, evenwith DSC.Therefore, do not reduce the additional safetymargin by driving in a risky manner.◀

Deactivating/activating the DSC OFFprogramThe program can be deactivated/activated viaDynamic Driving Control, refer to page 103.

Indicator/warning lampsThe indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐trols the drive forces and brake forces.The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

DTC Dynamic TractionControlThe conceptThe DTC system is a version of the DSC in whichforward momentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum forward momen‐tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowedsnowy roads, but driving stability is limited.It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐der the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in

deep snow or on loose surfaces.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Seite 101


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Deactivating/activating DTC DynamicTraction ControlThe system can be deactivated/activated via theTRACTION and SPORT+ programs of the Dy‐namic Driving Control, refer to page 103.

Dynamic Drive*The conceptDynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination ofthe vehicle that occurs during rapid driving incurves or during quick evasive maneuvers.Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐creased under all driving conditions. The systemutilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rearaxles that react immediately to all driving situa‐tions.

ProgramsThe system offers two different programs.The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ing Control, refer to page 103.

SPORTSporty tuning for greater driving agility.

NORMALComfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.

Dynamic Damping Control*The conceptThis system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐eling on uneven road surfaces.The system enhances driving dynamics andcomfort as required for the road surface anddriving style.

ProgramsThe system offers three different programs.The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ing Control, refer to page 103.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐ers for greater driving agility.

NORMALBalanced tuning between the COMFORT andSPORT programs.

COMFORTComfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbersfor optimal traveling comfort.

Integral Active Steering*The conceptIntegral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐tive Steering and rear axle steering.Active Steering varies the steering angle of thewheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ment as a function of the speed.At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,steering becomes more direct.The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in adirection opposite to the front wheels.At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ingly reduced.The rear wheels are turned to the same angle asthe front wheels.In critical situations, Integral Active Steering canspecifically steer the front and rear wheels tostabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes,e.g., when braking where road conditions differon the left and right sides of the vehicle.

InitializingIn rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐alize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A messageappears on the Control Display.

1. With the engine running, turn the steeringwheel all the way to the left and right several

Seite 102


Drivi

ng st

abili

ty co

ntro

l sys

tem

s

times in a uniform manner until the warninglamp disappears.

2. Have the system checked if the warninglamp does not go out after moving the steer‐ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steeringwheel is at an angle.

Using snow chainsEnsure that the rear axle steering is deactivatedwhen using snow chains, refer to page 233.

ProgramsThe system offers two different programs.The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ing Control, refer to page 103.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the Integral ActiveSteering for greater driving agility.

NORMALBalanced tuning of the Integral Active Steeringfor optimal traveling comfort.

MalfunctionIn the event of a malfunction, the steering wheelmust be turned further, while the vehicle re‐sponds more sensitively to steering wheelmovements in the higher speed range.The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐activated.Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.Have the system checked.

Self-leveling suspensionThe conceptThe self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicleheight and ground clearance constant. Theheight of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐tained at a predefined level under all load con‐ditions.

The system ensures consistent comfort bykeeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐uations.

MalfunctionA message appears on the Control Display. Amalfunction has occurred in the self-levelingsuspension. Vehicle handling may be alteredand driving comfort may be noticeably reduced.Visit your nearest service center.

Dynamic Driving Control*The conceptDynamic Driving Control can be used to adjustthe driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro‐grams are available for this purpose; they can beactivated using the two Dynamic Driving Controlbuttons.

Operating the programs

Press the button Program

DSC OFFTRACTION

SPORT+SPORTNORMALCOMFORT*

For Dynamic Damper Control*, the lower buttonis labeled with COMFORT.

Automatic program changeThe system automatically switches to NORMALin the following situations:▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering*.▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*.▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.

DSC OFFDriving stability is limited during accelerationand when driving in bends.

Seite 103


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Stabilizing interventions by the Integral ActiveSteering* system are only performed by the rearaxle steering.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC againas soon as possible.

Activating DSC OFFPress and hold the button, but not lon‐ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in‐strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed inthe tachometer.The DSC system is switched off.

Deactivating DSC OFFPress the button.DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lampsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐played in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐activated.

TRACTIONMaximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTCDynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐ing stability is limited during acceleration andwhen driving in bends.

Activating TRACTIONPress the button.TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐

eter.The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ter lights up.

Deactivating TRACTIONPress the button again.TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lampsWhen DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayedin the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐namic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT+Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐pension during limited driving stabilization.Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.The driver handles several of the stabilizationtasks.

Activating SPORT+Press the button repeatedly untilSPORT+ appears in the tachometer

and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐strument cluster.

Indicator/warning lampsSPORT+ is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐namic Traction Control is activated.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the suspension forgreater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐bilization.The program can be configured to individualspecifications.The configuration is stored for the remote con‐trol currently in use.

Activating SPORTPress the button repeatedly untilSPORT+ appears in the tachometer.

Configuring SPORTWhen the display is activated on the ControlDisplay, refer to page 105, the sport programcan be set to individual specifications.

Seite 104


Drivi

ng st

abili

ty co

ntro

l sys

tem

s

After the sport program is activated, select"Configure SPORT mode" on the displayedpanel and configure the program.Optionally, the sport program can be configuredbefore it is activated:

1. "Settings"2. "SPORT mode"

3. Configure the program.This configuration is retrieved when the sportprogram is activated.

NORMALFor a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐bilization.

Activating NORMALPress the button repeatedly until theprogram display in the tachometer

goes out.

In certain situations, the system automaticallychanges to the NORMAL program, automaticprogram change, refer to page 103.

COMFORT*Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbersfor optimal traveling comfort with maximumdriving stabilization.

Activating COMFORTPress the button repeatedly until COM‐FORT appears in the tachometer.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected programThe selected program is dis‐played in the tachometer.

Program selection

Pressing the button displays a list of the select‐able programs.

Display on the Control DisplayProgram changes can be displayed briefly onthe Control Display.To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"

Seite 105


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

3. "Display driving settings"

Drive-off assistantThis system supports driving away on gradients.The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐

out delay.After the foot brake is released, the vehicle isheld in place for approx. 2 seconds.Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle mayroll back slightly.

Driving off without delayAfter releasing the foot brake, start driving

without delay, since the drive-off assistant willnot hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rollingback.◀

Seite 106


Drivi

ng st

abili

ty co

ntro

l sys

tem

s

Driving comfortActive Cruise Control withStop & Go function, ACC*The conceptThis system can be used to select a desiredspeed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐cally on clear roads.To the extent possible, the system automaticallyadjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead ofyou.The distance that the vehicle maintains to thevehicle ahead of you can be varied.For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐tomatically decelerates, applies the brakeslightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle aheadbegins moving faster.If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, thesystem is able to detect this within the givensystem limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drivesaway again from a halt, your vehicle is able toaccelerate if operated accordingly.Even if some time passes before the vehicledrives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐erated automatically and simply.As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to thedesired speed.The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐dients, but may not be maintained on uphillslopes if engine power is insufficient.

Buttons at a glance

1 System on/off, interrupt2 Resume speed3 Store speed*4 Increase distance5 Store, maintain/change speed6 Reduce distance

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching onPress the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lamps in the instrument clusterlight up and the marking in the speedometer isset to the current speed.Cruise control can be used.When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐namic Stability Control, refer to page 101, isswitched on as well, if necessary.

Switching offDeactivated or interrupted systemIf the system is deactivated or interrupted,

actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is thedanger of an accident occurring.◀If switching off the system while stationary,press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Seite 107


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Press the button.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedand distance are deleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

If interrupting the system while stationary, presson the brake pedal at the same time.The system is automatically interrupted if:▷ The brakes are applied.▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ The safety belt and the driver's door are

opened when the vehicle is standing.▷ The system has not detected objects for an

extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐tle traffic without road edge line markings.

▷ The radar sensor is dirty.

Maintaining/storing the speedPress the button.

When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.It is displayed in the speedometer and brieflydisplayed in the instrument cluster, Displays inthe instrument cluster, refer to page 109.

Maintaining, storing or changing thespeedThe rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐rent speed.

Adapting the desired speedAdapt the desired speed to the road con‐

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐

wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐ring.◀

Speed differencesGreat speed differences with vehicles

driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap‐proaching a truck or when another vehicleswerves into your own lane, cannot be compen‐sated for by the system.◀

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed if the road isclear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in‐creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed pastthe point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by a maximum of5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed:110 mph/180 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat theaction.

DistanceSelecting a distanceAdjust the distance according to the traffic

and weather conditions; otherwise, there is thedanger of an accident occurring. Maintain theprescribed safety distance.◀

Reduce distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

Seite 108


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Increase distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Calling up the desired speed anddistance

While drivingPress the button with the systemswitched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed value isdeleted and cannot be called up again:▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standingBefore leaving the vehicleBefore leaving the vehicle with the engine

running, engage position P of the automatictransmission and apply the parking brake. Oth‐erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀▷ The vehicle was braked to a halt by the sys‐

tem.When the marking in the speedometer is or‐ange:The vehicle ahead of you drives away: to ac‐celerate, press on the accelerator briefly, orpress the RES button or the rocker switch.The marking turns green again and your ve‐hicle follows the vehicle ahead of you.

Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean thatthe vehicle ahead of you has driven off.▷ You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by

pressing on the brake pedal and it is stand‐ing behind another vehicle:

1. Press the button to call up a storeddesired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.

3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press theRES button or the rocker switch when thevehicle ahead of you drives away.


1 Display of desired speed2 Distance to vehicle ahead of you3 Vehicle symbol4 Brief status display

Desired speed

Marking in the speedometer▷ The marking lights up in

green: the system is active.▷ The marking lights up in or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the system isswitched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the systemrequirements for operation are currently notmet.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youThe selected distance to the vehicle drivingahead of you is shown.

Seite 109


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4This value is set after the system isswitched on.

The system has been interrupted ordistance control is deactivated be‐cause the accelerator is beingpressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is deactivated be‐cause the accelerator is beingpressed; a vehicle was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has drivenaway.

Indicator/warning lampsPersonal responsibilityThe indicator and warning lamps do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapthis or her desired driving speed and style to thetraffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up in orange:A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange:The conditions are not adequate for op‐erating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively assume control bypressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds:You are requested to intervene by brak‐

ing or making an evasive maneuver.

System limits

Speed rangeBest results are achieved when using the sys‐tem on well-developed roads and highways.The desired speed can be selected between20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.The system can also be activated when station‐ary.Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐tion when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and theautomatic braking capacity are limited.Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of youfor instance might not be detected.

Limited detection capacityBecause of the limits to the detection ca‐

pacity, you should be alert at all times so that youcan intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate when a sta‐tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of atraffic congestion.The system also does not respond to:▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.▷ Red traffic lights.▷ Stationary objects.▷ Cross traffic.▷ Approaching traffic.

Seite 110


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

No warningsA warning may not be issued when ap‐

proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, thereis the danger of an accident occurring.◀

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detecteduntil it is completely within the same lane as yourvehicle.

Swerving vehiclesIf a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not beable to automatically restore the selected dis‐tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, thesystem requests that the driver intervene bybraking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, ifnecessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly movesinto your lane from behind a stopped vehicle,

you yourself must react, as the system does notreact to stopped vehicles.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, thespeed is reduced slightly in the curve, althoughcurves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.In tight curves, situations may result due to therestricted detection range of the system inwhich a vehicle driving ahead of you may not bedetected at all, or not until after a considerabledelay.

When approaching a curve, the system may re‐act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due tothe bend of the curve. Any deceleration of thevehicle by the system can be compensated forby briefly accelerating. After the acceleratorpedal is released, the system becomes activeagain and independently controls the speed.

Driving awayIn some situations, the vehicle cannot driveaway automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐hind bumps in the road.

Seite 111


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Radar sensor

Position

Radar sensor

Dirty or covered sensorA dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐tion of vehicles.▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐

move layers of snow and ice carefully▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐

sor.

MalfunctionThe system cannot be activated if the sensor isnot aligned correctly. This may be caused bydamage incurred during parking, for example.A message is displayed if the system fails.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is governedby the following:FCC ID:▷ OAYARS3-ACompliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐




Collision warning withbraking function*The conceptThe system issues a two-phase warning of adanger of collision at speeds above approx.10 mph/15 km/h.The collision warning is available even if cruisecontrol has been deactivated.It responds to stationary or moving objects thatare within the detection range of the radar sys‐tem.

When the vehicle is intentionally brought intocontact with an object, the collision warning isdelayed to avoid false warnings.

Warning stages

PrewarningThis warning is issued, for example, when thereis the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Acute warning with braking functionWarning of the imminent danger of a collisionwhen the vehicle approaches another object ata relatively high differential speed.The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, isaccompanied by a braking intervention.The braking intervention is executed with lim‐ited braking force and for a brief period only. Theintervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com‐plete standstill.The braking intervention is executed only if DSCDynamic Stability Control, refer to page 101, isswitched on.

Adapting your speed and driving styleThe acute warning does not relieve the

driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her

Seite 112


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐tions.◀The braking intervention can be interrupted bypressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ing the steering wheel.When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switchoff the collision warning with the braking func‐tion to prevent accidental interventions.The braking function is deactivated if the DSCDynamic Stability Control or DTC DynamicTraction Control is deactivated.

Switching the warning function on/off

Press the button

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The state is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Configuring the prewarningAfter the warning function is switched on, thefollowing can be set via the iDrive:▷ The prewarning can be switched on/off.▷ The time of the prewarning can be set.These settings have no effect on the time of thewarning from the Active Cruise Control* thatprompts the driver to intervene or brake.

DisplayThe collision warning can be issued in the in‐strument cluster, in the Head-up Display* andacoustically.

Instrument clusterThe vehicle lights up in red: prewarning

The vehicle flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warningYou are requested to intervene by brak‐

ing or making an evasive maneuver.

Adapting your speed and driving styleThe display does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert and readyto intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of anaccident occurring.◀

Detection rangeThe detection capacity of the radar sensor andthe collision warning has limitations.This may result in the warning not being issuedor being issued late.For example, the following situations may not bedetected:▷ Slow moving objects when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

your vehicle.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.▷ Pedestrians.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

Seite 113


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Prewarning sensitivityIf the prewarning setting is too sensitive, theremay be an excess of false warnings.

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system is functional at speeds beginning atapprox. 20 mph/30 km/h.It maintains the speed that was set using thecontrol elements on the steering wheel.The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐gine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditionsDo not use the system if unfavorable con‐

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constantspeed, for instance:▷ On curvy roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on

a loose road surface.Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicleand cause an accident.◀

Controls

Buttons at a glance

1 System on/off, interrupt2 Resume speed3 Store speed*4 Store, maintain/change speed

Switching onPress the button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to thecurrent speed.Cruise control can be used.When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐namic Stability Control, refer to page 101, isswitched on as well, if necessary.

Switching offDeactivated or interrupted systemIf the system is deactivated or interrupted,

actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is thedanger of an accident occurring.◀

Press the button.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedis deleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:▷ The brakes are applied.▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.

Maintaining/storing the current speedPress the button.

When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.It is displayed in the speedometer and brieflydisplayed in the instrument cluster, Displays inthe speedometer, refer to page 115.

Seite 114


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

Change, maintain speedAdapting the desired speedAdapt the desired speed to the road con‐

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐ring.◀

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed if the road isclear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in‐creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed pastthe point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by a maximum of5 mph/10 km/h.

▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistancepoint and holding it accelerates or deceler‐ates the vehicle without requiring pressureon the accelerator. After the rocker switch isreleased, the vehicle maintains its finalspeed. Pressing the switch beyond the re‐sistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐erate more rapidly.

The rocker switch can be pressed while inter‐rupted to maintain and store the current speed.

Resuming the desired speedPress the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.


1 Display of desired speed2 Indicator lamp3 Brief status display

Desired speedDisplay in the speedometer:

▷ The marking lights up ingreen: the system is active.

▷ The marking lights up in or‐ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the system isswitched off.

Brief status displayBrief display in the speedometer:

Selected desired speed

If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad‐equate to operate the system.

PDC Park Distance Control*The conceptIn addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, thebackup camera*, refer to page 120, can beswitched on.PDC supports you when parking. Objects thatyou are approaching slowly in front of* or behindyour vehicle are indicated with:▷ Signal tones.▷ Visual display.

Seite 115


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

MeasurementMeasurements are made by ultrasound sensorsin the bumpers.The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given:▷ By the front* sensors and two rear corner

sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/

1.50 m.

System limitsCheck the traffic situation as wellPDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accidentcould result from road users or objects locatedoutside of the PDC detection range.Loud noises from outside and inside the vehiclemay prevent you from hearing the PDC's signaltone.◀

Avoid driving quickly with PDCAvoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yetactive.For technical reasons, the system may other‐wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects can reach the physicallimits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With low objects.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors before orafter a continuous tone sounds.High, protruding objects such as ledges may notbe detected.

False warningsPDC may issue a warning under the followingconditions even though there is no obstaclewithin the detection range:▷ In heavy rain.▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice.▷ When sensors are covered in snow.▷ On rough road surfaces.▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.▷ In heavy exhaust.▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steamcleaners or neon lights.

Switching on automaticallySelect transmission position R with the enginerunning.

Switching off automaticallyThe system switches off and the LED goes out:▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐

ward.▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐

ing forward.Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 116


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

Signal tonesWhen approaching an object, an intermittenttone is sounded that indicates the position of theobject. For example, if an object is detected tothe left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone soundsfrom the left rear speaker.The shorter the distance to the object becomes,the shorter the intervals.If the distance to a detected object is less thanapprox. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone issounded.If objects are located both in front of and behindthe vehicle, an alternating continuous signal issounded.The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.3 seconds:▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen‐sors.

▷ If moving parallel to a wall.The signal tone is switched off:▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.▷ When transmission position P is engaged.

VolumeYou can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,refer to page 173.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object can beshown on the Control Display. Objects that arefarther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐play before a signal tone sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, thescreen mask can also be turned by 90°.

If the backup camera image was selected last, itagain appears on the display. To switch to PDC:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbolon the Control Display.

2. Press the controller.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Zoom view*On the left part of the display screen, the vehicleis shown enlarged.

▷ Transmission position D engaged: frontarea of the vehicle.

▷ Transmission position R engaged: rear areaof the vehicle.

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via theiDriveWith PDC activated:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.

Seite 117


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

2. Press the controller.The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ting is stored for the remote control currently inuse.

MalfunctionDepending on the vehicle's equipment, thescreen mask can also be turned by 90°.

A Check Control message, refer to page 83, isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.On the Control Display, the areas in front of andbehind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed.Have the system checked.To ensure full operability:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and main‐tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround View*The conceptSurround View includes the following systems:▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120▷ Side View, refer to page 122.▷ Top View, refer to page 118.It assists the driver when parking, maneuveringand on blind driveways and intersections.

Top View*The conceptTop View assists you in parking and maneuver‐ing. The area around the doors and the road areaaround the vehicle are shown on the ControlDisplay for this purpose.

Capturing the imageThe image is captured by two cameras inte‐grated in the exterior mirrors and by the backupcamera.The range equals:▷ approx. 10 ft/3 m to the side.▷ approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐terior mirrors are detected early.

System limitsTop View cannot be used in the following situa‐tions:▷ With a door open.▷ With the tailgate open.▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.▷ In poor light.A Check Control message is displayed in someof these situations.

Check the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accidentcould result from road users or objects locatedoutside the picture area of the cameras.◀

Switching on automaticallySelect transmission position R with the enginerunning.The Top View and PDC images are displayed ifthe system is switched on via iDrive.


ward.

Seite 118


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐ing forward.

Switch on the system again if necessary.


Press the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.If Top View is displayed, switch on the backupcamera via the iDrive, refer to page 119.

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object can beshown on the Control Display.When the distance to an object is small, a red baris shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDCdisplay.

The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐tivated.

If the backup camera image was selected last, itagain appears on the display. To switch to TopView:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbolon the Control Display.




Switching on the backup camera via theiDriveWith Top View switched on:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.2. Press the controller.The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ting is stored for the remote control currently inuse.

BrightnessWith Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

ContrastWith Top View switched on:



Displaying the turning circle andpathway lines▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the

space needed to the side of the vehiclewhen the steering wheel is turned all theway.

▷ The variable, green pathway line assists youin assessing the amount of space actuallyneeded to the side of the vehicle.The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐justed with the steering wheel movement.

1. Select the symbol.2. Press the controller.Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

Seite 119


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Cameras

The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo‐cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 253.

Backup camera*The conceptThe backup camera provides assistance in park‐ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

System limitsCheck the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accidentcould result from road users or objects locatedoutside the picture area of the backup cam‐era.◀

Detection of objectsHigh, protruding objects such as ledges

may not be detected by the backup camera.◀

Switching on automaticallySelect transmission position R with the enginerunning.The backup camera image is displayed if thesystem was switched on via the iDrive.


ward.

▷ After approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when drivingforward.

Switch on the system again if necessary.


Press the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The PDC is shown on the Control Display.Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, referto page 122.

Assistance functions

Functional requirement▷ The backup camera is switched on.▷ The tailgate is fully closed.

Pathway lines

▷ Can be shown in the backup camera imagewhen in transmission position R.

▷ Help you to estimate the space requiredwhen parking and maneuvering on levelroads.

Seite 120


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

▷ Are dependent on the current steering angleand are continuously adjusted to the steer‐ing wheel movements.

Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121.

Turning circle lines

▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.▷ Show the course of the smallest possible

turning circle on a level road.▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed

when the steering wheel is turned.Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121.

Parking using pathway and turningcircle lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle

lines lead to within the limits of the parkingspace.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point wherethe pathway line covers the correspondingturning circle line.

Obstacle marking

▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown inthe backup camera image.

Their colored steps match the markings of thePDC. This simplifies estimation of the distanceto the object shown.

Activating the assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can be activeat the same time.

Showing the parking aid lines1. "Parking aid lines" Select the symbol.2. Press the controller.Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking1. "Obstacle marking" Select the symbol.2. Press the controller.Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Seite 121


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance


Switching on the backup camera via theiDriveWith PDC activated:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.2. Press the controller.The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ting is stored for the remote control currently inuse.

BrightnessWith the backup camera switched on:



ContrastWith the backup camera switched on:



Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of thetailgate. The image quality may be impaired bydirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 253.

Side View*The conceptSide View provides an early look at cross trafficat blind driveways and intersections. Road usersconcealed by obstacles to the left and right ofthe vehicle can only be detected relatively latefrom the driver's seat. To improve visibility, twocameras in the front of the vehicle record thetraffic situation on each side.

System limitsThe cameras capture a maximum range of330 ft/100 m.

DisplayThe images from both cameras are shown si‐multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle on blind driveways and intersections withyour own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐sult from road users or objects located outsidethe picture area of the Side View cameras.◀

Switching off automaticallySystem switches off: above approx. 9 mph/15 km/h.Switch on the system again if necessary.


Press the button.

Seite 122


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

Display on the Control DisplayThe traffic area to the left and right is displayedon the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show theposition of the front of the vehicle.

BrightnessWith the Side View switched on:



ContrastWith the Side View switched on:



Cameras

The two camera lenses are located on the sidesof the bumper.The image quality may be impaired by dirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 253.

Night Vision with pedestriandetection*The conceptNight Vision with pedestrian detection is a nightvision system.An infrared camera records the area in front ofthe vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐trol Display.The picture is a heat image. The system has anintegrated pedestrian detection function thatdetects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objectsthat are similar in shape to human beings aredetected by the system.

Personal responsibilityNight Vision cannot replace the driver's

personal judgment of the visibility conditionsand the traffic situation. The view ahead and theactual visibility conditions must always be thebasis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objectsin the field of view of the camera.Warm objects have a light appearance and coldobjects, a dark appearance.The ability to detect an object depends on thetemperature difference between the object andthe background and on the level of heat radiationemitted by the object. Objects that are similar intemperature to the environment or that radiatevery little heat are difficult to detect.

Seite 123


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Pedestrian detection

Warm objects that are similar in shape to humanbeings are detected by the system.People detected by the system are displayedwith a slight yellow hue.

Under good ambient conditions, the pedestriandetection system operates within a range of ap‐prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.

Warning of people in danger

If the system detects a person in a defined areain front of the vehicle and if a collision with thisperson is imminent, a warning symbol appearsin the Control Display and Head-up Display*.

The warning area in front of the vehicle is dividedinto two areas.▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.

▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left.The entire area moves along with the vehicle inthe direction of the steering angle and changeswith the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐creases, the area becomes longer and wider, forexample.

This symbol is displayed when a personis detected in the central area, arrow 1,immediately in front of the vehicle.

This symbol is displayed when a persondetected in the extended area, arrow 2,is moving from the right or left to the

central area.

The symbols in the Head-up Display* corre‐spond to the symbols in the Control Display. Forpeople located in the central area, the distanceto the person is indicated by the size of the sym‐bol.Although both the shape and the heat radiationare analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.

System limitsAnimals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐tection function, even if they are clearly visible inthe image.System operation is limited in situations such asthe following:▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves.▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ At very high external temperatures.

Pedestrian detectionLimited pedestrian detection:▷ When people are fully or partially covered,

especially when their heads are covered.▷ When people are not in an upright position,

e.g., when lying down.▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,

recumbent bicycles).

Seite 124


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,after an accident.

Activation/deactivation

Press the button.

Display

Heat image

For safety reasons, when driving at speedsabove approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambientlight, the image is only displayed when the lowbeams are switched on.A still image is displayed at regular intervals fora fraction of a second.Night Vision with pedestrian detection is notavailable on the rear screen.

Pedestrian detection

Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detec‐tion is not available, a symbol is displayed in theheat image.This symbol disappears when the function be‐comes available again.The pedestrian detection and warning systemonly operates in darkness and only when a heatimage is displayed.

Adjustments via the iDriveWith Night Vision switched on:

1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐tion.

2. Press the controller.3. Open the desired menu item.

▷ 1: "Brightness"▷ 2: "Contrast"▷ 3: "Pedestrian detection"

The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Seite 125


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Camera

Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐ation.The camera is automatically heated when theexternal temperatures are low.The camera is automatically cleaned togetherwith the headlamps.Clean the lens, refer to page 253.

Head-up Display*The concept

This system projects important information intothe driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.In this way, the driver can get information with‐out averting his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐play is influenced by:▷ Certain sitting positions.▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.

▷ Wet roads.▷ Unfavorable light conditions.If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐tings.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

Display

1 Lane departure warning*2 Active Cruise Control*3 Desired speed4 Navigation system*5 SpeedThe collision warning* or Check Control mes‐sages are displayed briefly if needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplay1. "Settings"2. "Head-up display"3. "Displayed information"

Seite 126


Drivi

ng co

mfo

rt

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-upDisplay.

The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted to theambient light.The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings"2. "Head-up display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller.

The brightness is adjusted.When the low beams are switched on, the basicsetting can be made using the instrument light‐ing, refer to page 89.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Adjusting the height1. "Settings"2. "Head-up display"3. "Height"4. Turn the controller.

The height is adjusted.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Special windshieldThe windshield is part of the system.The shape of the windshield makes it possibleto display a precise image.

A film in the windshield prevents double imagesfrom being displayed.Therefore, have the special windshield replacedby a service center only.

Seite 127


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Climate controlAutomatic climate control*

1 Air distribution, left side2 Temperature, left side3 AUTO program, left side4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,

left side5 Remove ice and condensation6 Maximum cooling7 Display8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right side9 AUTO program, right side10 Temperature, right side

11 Air distribution, right side12 Seat heating*, right side 5013 Active seat ventilation*, right side 5114 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐

lated-air mode15 Cooling function16 Rear window defroster17 ALL program18 Active seat ventilation*, left side 5119 Seat heating*, left side 50

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distributionPress the button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and footwell.

▷ Footwell.▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:

driver's side only.If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTObutton on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐sation sensor.

Seite 128


Clim

ate

cont

rol

TemperatureTurn the wheel to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control achieves thistemperature as quickly as possible, if necessarywith the maximum cooling or heating capacity,and then keeps it constant.Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐perature settings. The automatic climate controlwill not have sufficient time to adjust the settemperature.

AUTO programPress the button.Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTOintensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐rected to the windshield, side windows, upperbody, and into the footwell.The cooling function, refer to page 130, isswitched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐gram.At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐trols the program so as to prevent window con‐densation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program switched on, automaticcontrol of the air volume and air distribution canbe adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the button:decrease or increase the intensity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Air volume, manualTo be able to manually adjust the air volume,switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the button:decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensation

Press the button.Ice and condensation are quickly re‐

moved from the windshield and the front sidewindows.

The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐gram is active.

Maximum coolingPress the button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐gion. Open them for this purpose.Air is cooled as quickly as possible:▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/

0 ℃.▷ When the engine is running.The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐gram is active.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air modeYou can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currently withinthe vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to selectan operating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐

trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐side air and controls the shut-off automati‐cally.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐manently blocked.

Seite 129


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

If the windows are fogged over, switch offthe recirculated-air mode and press theAUTO button on the driver's side to utilizethe condensation sensor. Make sure that aircan flow onto the windshield.

Continuous recirculated-air modeThe recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the airquality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀

Cooling functionThe passenger compartment can only becooled with the engine running.

Press the button.The air is cooled and dehumidified and

– depending on the temperature setting –warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.When using the automatic climate control, con‐densation water, refer to page 148, developsthat exits underneath the vehicle.

Rear window defrosterPress the button.The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time.

All programPress the button.The current settings on the driver's side

for temperature, air volume, air distribution, andAUTO program are transferred to the front pas‐senger side and to the left and right rear*.The program is switched off if the settings onthe front passenger side and in the rear* arechanged.

Residual heatThe heat stored in the engine is used to heat theinterior.

Functional requirement▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been

switched off.▷ Warm engine.▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.

Switching on1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Press the right side of the button onthe driver's side.

is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐mate control.The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐tribution can be adjusted with the ignitionswitched on.

Switching offAt the lowest fan speed, press the left side of thebutton on the driver's side.

on the display of the automatic climate controlgoes out.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off▷ Complete system:

At the lowest fan speed, press theleft side of the button on the driver's

side.▷ On the front passenger side:

At the lowest fan speed, press theleft side of the button on the front

passenger side.

Switching onPress any button.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter removes dust and pollen fromthe incoming air.

Seite 130


Clim

ate

cont

rol

The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseouspollutants from the outside air that enters thevehicle.This combined filter should be replaced duringscheduled maintenance of your vehicle.More information can be found in the service re‐quirements display, refer to page 82.

VentilationFront ventilation

▷ Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐ture, arrows 1.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐row 2.

▷ Thumb wheels for opening and closing thevents continuously, arrows 3.

Ventilation levels*▷ Draft-free ventilation:

Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the aircurrent is fanned out.

▷ Maximum air volume:Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the airis partially fanned out and partially bundled.This maximizes the air supply.

▷ Direct ventilation:Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air isbundled and can be directed to a specificpoint.

Adjusting the ventilation▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot fromthe sun.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in rear, center

▷ Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐ture, arrows 1.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐row 2.

▷ Thumb wheels for opening and closing thevents continuously, arrows 3.

Lateral ventilation*

Thumb wheel for opening and closing the ventscontinuously, arrow.

Seite 131


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Rear automatic climatecontrol*At a glance

1 Temperature2 AUTO program3 Vent settings4 Air volume, AUTO intensity5 Display6 Maximum cooling7 Seat heating* 538 Active seat ventilation* 53

Switching the rear automatic climatecontrol on/off1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Rear climate control"The rear automatic climate control is not opera‐tional if the automatic climate control isswitched off or if the function for defrosting ordefogging the windows is active.

AUTO programPress the button.Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically:

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTOintensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐rected to the upper body and into the footwell.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program switched on, automaticcontrol of the air volume and air distribution canbe adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the button:decrease or increase the intensity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

TemperatureTurn the wheel to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control achieves thistemperature as quickly as possible, if necessarywith the maximum cooling or heating capacity,and then keeps it constant.Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐perature settings. The automatic climate controlwill not have sufficient time to adjust the settemperature.

Manual air distributionThe air distribution can be adjusted to individualneeds.

Press the button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and footwell.▷ Footwell.

Air volume, manualTo be able to manually adjust the air volume,switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the button:decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Seite 132


Clim

ate

cont

rol

Switching the system on/off

Switching offAt the lowest fan speed, press the leftside of the button on the driver's side.

Switching onPress any button.

Maximum coolingPress the button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐gion. Open them for this purpose.Air is cooled as quickly as possible:▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/

0 ℃.▷ When the engine is running.

Parked-car ventilationThe conceptThe parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicleinterior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.The system can be switched on and off directlyor by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐mains switched on for 30 minutes.They can be operated via iDrive.

Parked-car ventilationUsing the preset switch-on time or when oper‐ated directly: any external temperature.Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly1. "Settings"2. "Climate"

3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The system is switched on. The symbolon the automatic climate control flashes.The system continues to run for some time afterbeing switched off.

Preselecting the switch-on time1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"4. Enter the desired time.5. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

Activating the switch-on time1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

The activation time is activated. Thesymbol on the automatic climate control lightsup.

The symbol on the automatic climate controlflashes when the system has been switched on.The system will only be switched on within thenext 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.

Seite 133


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Interior equipmentIntegrated universal remotecontrol*The conceptThis system can replace up to three differenthand-held transmitters for various types of re‐mote-controlled equipment, such as garagedoors or lighting systems.The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐grammed on one of the three memory buttons.The corresponding device can then be operatedusing the programmed memory button.The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐mitted.When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐grams for security reasons.

During programmingDuring programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the universal remote control,ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob‐jects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk ofinjury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packagingor in the instructions of the hand-heldtransmitter, the remote-controlled de‐

vice is generally compatible with the universalremote control.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ Your service center.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

Programming

▷ LED, arrow 1.▷ Memory buttons, arrow 2.

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx.20 seconds until the LED flashes.All programs of the three memory buttons,arrow 2, are cleared.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distanceof approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐ory buttons.

4. Simultaneously press the transmit button ofthe hand-held transmitter and the memorybutton of the universal remote control.The LED flashes slowly.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashesrapidly.If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.15 seconds, change the distance and repeatthe step.

The device can be operated using the memorybutton with the engine running or the ignitionswitched on.

MalfunctionIf the device cannot be used after repeated at‐tempts at programming, please check whetherthe hand-held transmitter is equipped with analternating code system.

Seite 134


Inte

rior e

quip

men

t

To do so:▷ Read the instructions of the hand-held

transmitter.▷ Press the memory button of the universal

remote control for an extended period.If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period andthen lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec‐onds, the hand-held transmitter is equippedwith an alternating code system.In this case, program the memory buttons asdescribed under Alternating-code hand-heldtransmitters.

Alternating-code hand-heldtransmittersPlease obtain information on synchronizing thedevice in the operating manual of the device be‐ing set up.Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐ond person.

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the universal remote control as de‐scribed above under Fixed-code hand-heldtransmitters.

3. Press and hold the programmed button onthe interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec‐onds until the device to be adjusted is acti‐vated.If the device does not become activated,press and hold the button and watch theLED:▷ If the LED lights up continuously, the

programming is completed. The deviceshould become activated when the but‐ton is pressed briefly.

▷ If the LED flashes for approx. 2 secondsand then lights up continuously, con‐tinue the programming procedure be‐ginning with step 4.

4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.

5. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐vice to be set. You have approx. 30 secondsfor the next step.

6. Press the programmed memory button ofthe universal remote control three times.

The device can be operated when the engine isrunning or the ignition is switched on.

Reassigning individual programs1. Switch on the ignition.2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance

of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐ory buttons.

3. Press the memory button of the universalremote control.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.20 seconds, press the transmit button onthe hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashesrapidly.If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.15 seconds, change the distance and repeatthe step.

Deleting all stored programsPress the left and right memory buttons for ap‐prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.All stored programs are deleted.The programs cannot be deleted individually.

Seite 135


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Ashtray/cigarette lighter*Front

Opening

Press on the cover.

Emptying

Take out the insert.

LighterPush in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Danger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐trol with you when leaving the vehicle so thatchildren cannot use the lighter and burn them‐selves.◀

Rear

Opening

Press on the cover.

EmptyingTake out the insert.

Connecting electrical devicesSocketsThe lighter socket can be used for electrical de‐vices up to approx. 200 watts with 12 volts withthe engine running or the ignition switched on.Do not damage the socket by using unsuitableconnectors.

Front center console

Press on the cover.Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.

Seite 136


Inte

rior e

quip

men

t

Rear center console

Remove the cover.

In the trunk

To access the socket: fold open the cover.

TrunkTrunk cover

NoteDo not deposit heavy objectsDo not deposit heavy or hard objects on

the trunk cover. Otherwise, they could endangeroccupants during braking and evasive maneu‐vers, for example.◀

RemovingTo load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐moved.

1. Place your hands into the two recessedgrips on the bottom of the cover.

2. Push up the cover.The cover can be stowed in the rear compart‐ment in the trunk, refer to page 143.

Installing1. Insert the trunk cover into the two front re‐

taining pins.

2. Fold down the cover until it engages.

Through-loading system

General informationThe trunk can be expanded by folding down thetrunk partition and the rear seat backrest.

Seite 137


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

The trunk partition and the rear backrest aresubdivided at a ratio of 40–20–40. You can alsofold down the left and right sides separately.

Foldable rear backrests, manual

Pull the lever. The backrest folds forward.Fold the backrest back; the backrest engages inan upright position. Pull the lever again to adjustthe backrest to the desired angle.

Locking the backrestsBefore letting passengers ride in the rear,

engage the seat backrests, locking them inplace. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀

Foldable rear backrests, powered*

1 Fold backrest forward2 Loading position3 Basic position

Fold backrest forwardMove the front seats to an upright positionBefore folding down the rear backrests,

ensure that the front seats are moved forwardslightly and are in an upright position. Other‐wise, the head restraint and screen could bedamaged.◀

Press the button until the backrest isfolded all the way forward.

Folding the backrest backBefore anyone can be transported in the rear:

1. Put the rear seat backrests into their stand‐ard position.

2. For the best possible individual seat posi‐tion, adjust the inclination of the rear seatbackrest if necessary.

Adjust the standard position of the rearseat backrest

Before transporting anyone in the rear and ad‐justing the individual seat position, adjust thestandard position of the rear seat backrests.Otherwise, the restraining effect of the seats canbe limited in an accident because the backrestposition is set too steep.◀

Loading positionPress the button. The seat moves for‐ward and the backrest moves to the ba‐

sic position. Comfortable seating is still possiblealthough knee clearance is reduced.

Basic positionPress and hold the button until the seatstops automatically in its basic position.

Operation of the rear backrest wasdeactivatedAfter a brief period, operation of the rear back‐rest is deactivated to save battery power.To reactivate operation:▷ Open or close a door or the tailgate.▷ Press a button on the remote control.▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

Folding down the trunk partition1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.

Seite 138


Inte

rior e

quip

men

t

2. To release the trunk partition, pull the cor‐responding lever in the trunk. The trunk par‐tition folds forward.

Unlocking the middle trunk partition

Press the opener toward the left.

Closing the trunk partitionFolding back and engaging the trunk partition.

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the path of the cargo cover

is clear when folding it back up; otherwise, inju‐ries may result.◀

Ensure that the lock is securely engagedWhen folding back the backrest, be sure

that it locks in place securely. If it is not properlyengaged, transported cargo could enter thepassenger compartment during braking or eva‐sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu‐pants.◀

Loading positionTo expand the trunk, the cargo cover can bemoved into a vertical position.

1. Move the rear backrest to the loading posi‐tion, refer to page 138.

2. To release the cargo cover, pull both leversin the trunk. The cargo cover folds into anupright position and rests against the rearbackrest.

RepositioningFold back the cargo cover and snap into place

Ski and snowboard bag*General informationThe ski and snowboard bag is contained in aprotective jacket in the trunk.Follow the installation and operation instruc‐tions included in the protective jacket.

Seite 139


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Storage compartmentsStorage compartmentsThe following storage compartments are avail‐able in the vehicle interior:▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and front

passenger side, refer to page 140.▷ Storage compartment in the center console,

refer to page 142.▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,

refer to page 141, in the front and rear.▷ Compartments in the doors.▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front

seats*.▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.

No loose objects in the passenger com‐partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐partment without securing them; otherwise,they may present a danger to occupants for in‐stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐vers.◀

Glove compartmentFront passenger side

Opening

Pull the handle.The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Close the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately afteruse while driving; otherwise, injury may occurduring accidents.◀

ClosingFold up the cover.

USB interface for data transfer

Connection for importing and exporting data onUSB devices, e.g.:▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33.▷ Music collection, refer to page 187.Observe the following when connecting:▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface.▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Seite 140


Stor

age

com

partm

ents

Driver's side

Opening

Pull the handle.

Close the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately afteruse while driving; otherwise, injury may occurduring accidents.◀

ClosingFold up the cover.

Center armrestFrontA storage compartment is located in the centerarmrest between the front seats.

Opening

Press the buttons next to the lock.

Locking the storage compartment

The storage compartment in the armrest can belocked with a key to separately secure the tail‐gate, refer to page 41, for example.

After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐mote control can be handed out without the in‐tegrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at ahotel.This prevents access to the storage compart‐ment and to the trunk.

Connection for an external audiodevice

This can be used to connect an external audiodevice, such as a CD or MP3 player.

▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 192.▷ USB audio interface*, refer to page 193.

RearA storage compartment is located in the centerarmrest between the seats.

Seite 141


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Folding down

Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.

OpeningStorage compartment in the rear center arm‐rest.

Storage compartment in thecenter console

To open: press the button.

CupholdersNotes

Shatter-proof containers and no hotdrinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and donot transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is theincreased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containersDo not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐age.◀

Front

To open: press on the cover.

RearIn the front center armrest.

To open: press the button.

Clothes hooksThe clothes hooks are located next to the grabhandles in the rear and on the door pillar in therear.

Do not obstruct viewWhen suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver'svision.◀

No heavy objectsDo not hang heavy objects from the hooks;

otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐vers.◀

Seite 142


Stor

age

com

partm

ents

Storage compartments in thetrunkRetaining strapsRetaining straps on the left* and right side trimfor fastening small objects.

Multi-function hookThere are two multi-function hooks on the trunkwalls.

1. Open the holder by pressing on the button.

2. Press the bag handle into the holder fromabove.

Light and suitable objects onlyOnly hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger ofobjects flying about during braking and evasivemaneuvers.Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it hasbeen appropriately secured.◀

Storage compartments in the floor

Rear compartmentThe trunk cover, refer to page 137, can bestowed in the rear compartment.

To open the cover, pull upward on the handle,arrow 1.To close the cover, press downward until itlocks.You can fix the cover in an upright position, ifneeded. To do so, unhook the right-hand retain‐ing strap and hook it into the rear of the cover.

Do not stow heavy objectsOnly stow light objects in the rear com‐

partment; otherwise, damage may occur.◀

Front compartmentTo open, reach into the recess and raise thehandle, arrow 2.The cover can be completely removed.

Lashing eyes

To secure cargo, refer to page 149, with nets ordraw straps, the trunk is fitted with lashing eyes.

Seite 143


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Driving tipsThis chapter provides you with information useful

in dealing with specific driving and operatingmodes.


Things to remember when drivingBreaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need to be broken in to adjust toeach other.The following instructions will help achieve along vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differentialAlways obey the official speed limit.

Up to approx. 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDrive at varying engine and road speeds but donot exceed:▷ In gasoline engines, 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/

160 km/h.Avoid full-throttle operation and use of thetransmission's kickdown mode for the initialmiles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐riod.Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimizedcontact and wear patterns between brake padsand rotors. Drive conservatively during thisbreaking-in period.

Following part replacementThe same breaking in procedures should be ob‐served if any of the components mentioned

above have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

General driving notesClosing the tailgate

Drive with the tailgate closedOnly operate the vehicle with the tailgate

closed; otherwise, exhaust fumes could enterthe passenger compartment.◀If the vehicle must be driven with the tailgateopen:

1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof*.2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto‐

matic climate control system.

Hot exhaust systemHot exhaust systemHigh temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. When driv‐ing, standing at idle and while parking, take careto avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐haust system and any highly flammable materi‐als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contactcould lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seriouspersonal injury as well as property damage.Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, thereis the danger of getting burned.◀

Seite 146


Thin

gs to

rem

embe

r whe

n dr

iving

Climate control windshield

The marked area is not covered with a heat-re‐flective coating.Use this area for garage door openers, devicesfor electronic toll collection, etc.

Climate control laminated tinted safetyglassThe vehicle glass provides full protectionagainst the harmful effects of UV radiation on theskin.

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside thevehicle without connecting them directly to theexternal antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐tronics and mobile communication devices caninterfere with each other. In addition, there is noassurance that the radiation generated duringtransmission will be discharged from the vehicleinterior.◀

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduceyour speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

Driving through waterDrive though calm water only if it is not deeperthan 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, nofaster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walkingspeed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐trical systems and the transmission may bedamaged.◀

Braking safelyYour vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standardfeature.Applying the brakes fully is the most effectiveway of braking in situations when this is neces‐sary.The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimumof steering effort.Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet or there is heavy rain, brieflyexert gentle pressure on the brake pedal everyfew miles.Ensure that this action does not endanger otherroad users.The heat generated in this process helps dry thebrake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsDrive long or steep downhill gradients in the gearin which the least braking is required. Otherwise,the brake system may overheat, resulting in areduction in the brake system efficiency.

Seite 147


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

You can increase the engine's braking effect byshifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐matic transmission, refer to page 72.

Avoid load on the brakesAvoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure canlead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐sibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutralDo not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. Inaddition, steering and brake assist is unavailablewith the engine stopped.◀

No objects in the area around the pedalsNever allow floor mats, carpets or any

other objects to protrude into the area of pedalmovement and impair pedal operation.◀

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contaminationon the brake pads are furthered by:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressurethat must be exerted by the pads during brakeapplications to clean the discs is not reached.Should corrosion form on the brake discs, thebrakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicleWhen using the automatic climate control, con‐densation water develops that exits underneaththe vehicle.Therefore, traces of condensed water under thevehicle are normal.

LoadingOverloading the vehicle

To avoid exceeding the approved carrying ca‐pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐creases the rate at which damage develops in‐side the tires. This could result in a sudden lossof tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the trunkMake sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐aged.◀

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐hicle’s placard*:▷ The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg orYYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐hicle and unstable driving situations mayresult.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or YYYpounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the available

Seite 148


Thin

gs to

rem

embe

r whe

n dr

iving

cargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transfered to yourvehicle. Consult the manual for transportinga trailer to determine how this may reducethe available cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity of your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as lowas possible, ideally directly behind the trunkpartition.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is notoccupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests,

including the trunk partition, to stow cargo.

Securing cargo

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐taining straps, a trunk net* or draw straps.

▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargostraps*.Cargo straps can be attached to four lashingeyes located in the trunk.

Securing cargoAlways position and secure the cargo as

described above; otherwise, it can endanger thecar's occupants if sudden braking or swervingbecomes necessary.Heavy or hard objects should not be carriedloose inside the car; otherwise, they could bethrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐pants.◀

Roof-mounted luggage rackSpecial rack system as optionalaccessoryA special rack system is available as an optionalaccessory.Follow the directions given in the installation in‐structions.

Seite 149


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Anchorage points

Fold the cover outward.

MountingBe sure that adequate clearance is maintainedfor raising and opening the glass sunroof*.

Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rackBecause of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-mounted luggage racks cannot be mounted.

LoadingBecause roof racks raise the vehicle's center ofgravity when loaded, they have a major effect onvehicle handling and steering response.Therefore, note the following when loading anddriving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads

and the approved gross vehicle weight, referto page 258.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐

tom.▷ Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and

securely.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration

and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐tly.

Saving fuelGeneral informationYour vehicle contains advanced technology forthe reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐sions.Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors.The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ing style and regular maintenance, refer topage 238, can have an influence on fuel con‐sumption and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following useRemove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggageracks which are no longer required followinguse.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof*Driving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andraises fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if necessary, correct the tire inflationpressure, refer to page 227, at least twice amonth and before starting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away without delayDo not wait for the engine to warm up while thevehicle remains stationary. Start driving rightaway, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the fastest way for the cold engine toreach its operating temperature.

Seite 150


Thin

gs to

rem

embe

r whe

n dr

iving

Look well ahead when drivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicledriving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and looking ahead reducesfuel consumption.

Use coasting conditionsWhen approaching a red light, take your foot offthe accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐celerator and let the vehicle roll.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longerstopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in trafficcongestion.Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle isswitched off for only approx. 4 seconds.

Switch off any functions that are notcurrently neededFunctions such as seat heating and the rear win‐dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.Therefore, switch off these functions if they arenot actually needed.

Have maintenance carried outHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle economy and operating life.Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐ice center.Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐tem, refer to page 238.

Seite 151


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

NavigationThis chapter contains various examples of howthe navigation system can guide you reliably to

your destination.


NavigationNavigation systemGeneral informationThe navigation system can determine the pre‐cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliablyguide you to every entered destination.Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and canbe updated.

Entries in stationary vehicleEnter data only when the vehicle is sta‐

tionary, and always give priority to the applicabletraffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐tion between traffic and road conditions and theinstructions issued by the navigation system.Failure to take to this precaution can place youin violation of the law and put vehicle occupantsand other road users in danger.◀

Destination inputManual destination entry

General informationThe system supports you in entering streetnames and house numbers by automaticallycompleting the entry and providing entry com‐parisons, refer to page 24.Stored town/city and street names can be calledup quickly.▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,

the entries for the state/province and town/city can be skipped.

▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/city center if no street is entered.

Entering a state/province1. Press the MENU button.2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

4. Select "State/Province" or the displayedstate/province.

Entering a town/city1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary.The list is narrowed down further with eachentry.

3. Move the controller to the right.4. Select the town/city name from the list.If there are several towns/cities with the samename:

1. Change to the list of town/city names.2. Highlight the town/city.

With the Professional navigation system: Apreview map is displayed on the split screen.

3. Select the town/city.

Seite 154


Navig

atio

n

Entering the postal code1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐

played town/city.2. Select the symbol.3. Select the numbers.4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/

cities.5. Highlight the postal code.


6. Select the postal code.

Entering a street and intersection1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.2. Enter a street and intersection in the same

way as you would enter a town/city.If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names.2. Highlight the street.


3. Select the street.

Alternative: enter the street addressand house number1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.3. "House number"4. Select the numbers.5. Change to the list of house numbers.6. Select a house number or range of house

numbers.

Entering a street without a destinationtown/cityAll streets of the selected state/province are of‐fered. The associated town/city is displayed af‐ter the street name.The desired street does not exist in the specifiedcity/town because it belongs to another part ofthe city/town.

1. "Navigation"2. "Enter address"3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.4. Change to the list of street names.5. "In" the displayed state/province.

6. Select the letters.7. Change to the list of street names.8. Highlight the street.


9. Select the street.

Starting destination guidance afterentering the destination1. "Accept destination"2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."▷ Adjusting "Route preference", refer to

page 162.▷ Searching "Points of Interest at loc.", refer

to page 157.

Address book

Selecting a destination from theaddress book1. "Navigation"2. "Address book": contacts with addresses

are displayed if these have been checked asdestinations.If the mobile phone* does not display thecontacts with addresses, they must first be

Seite 155


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

checked as a destination, refer topage 214.

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with"A-Z search".

4. If necessary, select "Business address" or"Home address".

Storing the destination in the addressbookAfter entering the destination, store the desti‐nation in the address book.

1. Open "Options".2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

3. Select an existing contact, if available.4. Select "Business address" or "Home

address".5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First

name".6. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the positionThe current position can be stored in the ad‐dress book.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position

to contact"

4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐isting contact from the list. Select the typeof address and enter the first and last name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address1. "Navigation"2. "Address book"3. Highlight the entry.4. Open "Options".5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as thedestinationThe home address must be stored. Specify thehome address, refer to page 213.

1. "Navigation"2. "Address book"3. "Home"

4. Start destination guidance.

Seite 156


Navig

atio

n

Last destinations

At a glanceThe destinations previously entered are storedautomatically.The destinations can be called up and used as adestination for destination guidance.

Calling up the last destination1. "Navigation"2. "Last destinations"

3. Select the destination.4. Start destination guidance.

Editing the destination1. "Navigation"2. "Last destinations"3. Highlight the destination.4. Open "Options".5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations1. "Navigation"2. "Last destinations"3. Highlight the destination.4. Open "Options".5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last

destinations"

Special destinations

Opening the search for specialdestinationsTo select special destinations, e.g., hotels ortourist attractions:

1. "Navigation"2. "Points of Interest"

Narrow the search for special destinationsby specifying the location and category.

Position of special destinations1. "Search area"

2. Select the location where the system is tosearch for the special destination: "Atcurrent location", "At destination", "At adifferent destination", "Along route"

Special destinations category1. "Category"2. Select "All" or the specific category of the

special destination, e.g., hotels or restau‐rants.

Category detailsFor some special destinations, additional detailscan be displayed that are available in the navi‐gation data, e.g., an Italian-style restaurant."Category details"

Seite 157


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Starting the search for specialdestinations1. "Start search"

A list of the special destinations is displayed.▷ "At current location"

The special destinations are listed ac‐cording to their distance from the cur‐rent location and are displayed with a di‐rectional arrow pointing to thedestination.

▷ "At destination", "At a differentdestination" and "Along route"Special destinations are sorted by thedistance to the search point.

▷ Destinations of the selected categoryare displayed in the map view as sym‐bols. The display depends on the scaleof the map and the category.

2. Highlight the special destination.With the Professional navigation system: Apreview map is displayed on the split screen.

3. Select a special destination.4. Select the symbol.5. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."

If a phone number is available, a connectioncan be established if necessary.

Destination entry via BMW Assist*A connection is established to the Conciergeservice, refer to page 217.

1. "Navigation"2. "Enter address"3. Open "Options".

4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Entering the special destination by itsname1. "Navigation"2. "Points of Interest"3. "Name, A-Z search"4. Select the letters.

Depending on the distance, the search maytake some time. The list can contain a max‐imum of 100 entries.

5. Change to the list of special destinations.6. Highlight the special destination.


7. Select a special destination.8. Select the symbol.9. "Start guidance"

Displaying special destinations in themapTo display symbols of the special destinationsin the map view:

1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. Open "Options".4. "Display Points of Interest"

5. Select the setting.

Destination via map

Opening the map1. "Navigation"

Seite 158


Navig

atio

n

2. "Map"The map section is displayed. The map showsthe current position of the vehicle.

Selecting the destination1. Select the symbol.

"Interactive map" is started.2. Select the destination with crosshairs.

▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.▷ To shift the map: move the controller in

the required direction.▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the

controller in the required direction andturn it.

3. Press the controller to display additionalmenu items.▷ Select the symbol.

"Start guidance" or "Add as anotherdest."

▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the mapview.

▷ "Find points of interest": the search forspecial destinations is started.

Specifying the streetIf the system cannot recognize a street, it dis‐plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi‐nates of the destination.

Interactive mapIn the interactive map, the scale can be adjustedand the visible map section can be shifted. Inaddition, pressing the controller makes furtherfunctions available:

▷ Select the symbol. Start destinationguidance to the location marked on the map.

▷ "Exit interactive map"▷ "View in northern direction"▷ "Display destination": the map section

around the destination is displayed.▷ "Display current location": the map section

around your current location is displayed.▷ "Find points of interest"

Destination entry by voice*

General information▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐

fer to page 25.▷ When entering the destination by voice, you

can change between voice operation andthe iDrive.

▷ To have the available spoken instructionsread aloud ›Voice commands‹

Saying the entries▷ Example: to enter a town/city in Germany as

a whole word, the language of the systemmust be German.

▷ The town/city, street, and house numbercan be said as a single sentence.

▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐tersections can be said as whole words orspelled in the language of the system, referto page 81.

▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language andthe language of the system differ.

▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐gerating the pronunciation and insertinglengthy pauses between the letters.

Seite 159


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Entering the address

1. Briefly press the button on thesteering wheel.

2. ›Enter address‹3. Wait for a request from the system.4. Specify the desired address in the sug‐

gested form.5. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system.6. If necessary, individually name the separate

components of the address, e.g., the town/city.

Entering a town/cityThe town/city can either be said as a word orspelled.

1. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹.2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the

town/city.3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at

least the first three letters.Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐ies may be suggested.

4. Select the town/city.▷ To select a recommended town/

city: ›Yes‹▷ To select a different town/city: ›New

entry‹▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ... ‹ e.g., entry 2▷ To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹

Entering a street or intersectionEnter a street or intersection in the same way asyou would enter a town/city.

Entering a house numberHouse numbers can be entered up to the num‐ber 999 999.›House number‹Say each digit separately.

Starting destination guidance›Start guidance‹ or, if necessary, Enter newdestination‹

Storing a destinationThe destination is automatically added to the listof last destinations.

Planning a trip

New tripAdditional intermediate destinations can be en‐tered for a trip.

1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. Select the symbol.4. "Enter new destination"

5. Select the type of destination entry and en‐ter the intermediate destination.

Entering intermediate destinationsA maximum of 30 intermediate destinations canbe entered for one trip.

1. "Enter new destination"

Seite 160


Navig

atio

n

2. Select the type of destination entry and en‐ter the intermediate destination.

3. Select "Add as another dest.".4. Select the location where the intermediate

destination is to be inserted: "Repositiondest. in the trip"

Starting the tripAfter all intermediate destinations have beenentered, "Start guidance".Or select a trip that has already been stored, ifavailable. "Stored trips"

With the Professional navigationsystem: Storing a tripUp to 30 created trips can be stored in the triplist.

1. Open "Options".2. "Store trip"3. Enter the letters.4. "OK"

Trip directionThe trip direction is reversed: intermediate des‐tinations are displayed in reverse order in the list.

1. "Map"2. "Guidance"3. "Options"4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Intermediate destination options1. "Destination in the trip"2. Select an intermediate destination.

▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move anintermediate destination to another po‐sition in the list.

▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"

With the Professional navigationsystem: Deleting a trip1. "Stored trips"2. Highlight the desired trip.3. Open "Options".4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Destination guidanceStarting destination guidance1. "Navigation"2. Make a destination entry, refer to

page 154.3. "Accept destination"4. "Start guidance"▷ The route is shown on the Control Display.▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐

ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐rival are displayed in the map view.

▷ The arrow display is shown in the instrumentpanel and on the Control Display if neces‐sary.

Terminating destination guidance1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. Select the symbol.4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidanceIf the destination was not reached during the lasttrip, destination guidance can be resumed."Resume guidance"

Seite 161


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Route criteria

General information▷ The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria.▷ The route criteria can be changed when the

destination is entered and during destina‐tion guidance.

▷ Road types are part of the navigation dataand are taken into consideration when plan‐ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.

▷ The recommended route may differ from theroute you would take based on personal ex‐perience.

▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐trol currently in use.

Changing the route criteria1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. "Route preference"4. Select the criterion:

▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route, be‐ing a combination of the shortest possi‐ble route and the fastest roads.

▷ "Efficient route": optimized combina‐tion of the fastest and shortest route.

▷ "Short route": short distance, irrespec‐tive of how fast or slow progress will be.

▷ "Alternative routes": other suggestedalternative routes.

5. Specify additional criteria for the route, ifnecessary:▷ "Avoid highways": highways are

avoided wherever possible.

▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoidedwherever possible.

▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoidedwhere possible.

Dynamic destination guidanceThe route is automatically changed in the eventof traffic obstructions.▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐

structions along the original route.▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on

the map.▷ Depending on the type of road and the na‐

ture and length of the traffic obstruction, theroute can also be calculated so that youtravel through the traffic obstruction.

Activating dynamic destination guidance1. "Navigation"2. Open "Options".3. "Dynamic guidance"

RouteDifferent views of the route are available duringdestination guidance:▷ Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on

the Control Display.▷ List of streets and towns/cities.▷ Map view, refer to page 164.▷ Arrow display on the Head‐Up Display*, re‐

fer to page 126.

Arrow viewThe following information is displayed duringdestination guidance:▷ Large arrow, current direction of travel.▷ Small arrow, indicator of next change in di‐

rection.▷ Intersection view.▷ Lane information.▷ Traffic bulletins.▷ Distance to next change in direction.▷ Street name at next change in direction.

Seite 162


Navig

atio

n

Displaying a list of streets or towns/cities on the routeWhen destination guidance is started, a list ofthe streets and towns/cities on the route is dis‐played. The driving distances and traffic bulle‐tins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation"2. "Route information"3. Highlight a section.

With the Professional navigation system:The route section is displayed on the splitscreen.

Bypassing a section of the routeCalculate a new route for a route section.

1. "Navigation"2. "Route information"3. "New route for:"

4. Turn the controller. Enter the desired num‐ber of miles.


Resuming the original routeIf the route section should no longer be by‐passed:

1. "Navigation"2. "Route information"3. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendationThe remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐tions along the route are recommended.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"3. "Recommended refuel"

A list of the gas stations is displayed.4. Highlight a gas station.

With the Professional navigation system:The position of the gas station is shown onthe split screen.

5. Select the gas station.6. Select the symbol.7. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."

Switching spoken instructions on/offThe setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. Select the symbol.

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switchedon

Spoken instructions are switchedoff

Repeating spoken instructions1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. Highlight the symbol.4. Press the controller twice.

Volume of spoken instructionsTurn the volume button while giving an instruc‐tion until the desired volume is set.

Saving the spoken instructions on theprogrammable memory buttonsThe function for switching the spoken instruc‐tions on/off can be stored on a programmablememory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐cess.

Seite 163


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Map viewSelecting the map viewYour location is indicated on the map.After destination guidance is started, the plan‐ned route is displayed on the map.The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

1. "Navigation"2. "Map"The following functions are directly available inthe map view:

Symbol Function

Starting/ending destinationguidance

Switching spoken instructionson/off

Changing the route criteria

Searching for special destina‐tions

Displaying traffic bulletins

Interactive map

Map view settings

Changing the scale

Press the controller to show/suppress addi‐tional information on the map.

Changing the map section Open the interactive map.

▷ To shift the map: move the controller in therequired direction.

▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing the scale1. Select the symbol.2. To change the scale: turn the controller.

Automatically scaled map scaleIn the map view facing north, turn the controllerin any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐played. The map shows the entire range fromyour location to the destination.

Settings for the map viewThe map is shown on the Control Display.

1. Open "Options".2. "Settings"Set the optimized map view.▷ "Day/night mode"

Select and create the necessary settingsdepending on the light conditions. When thetraffic situation/gray card is activated, thissetting is not taken into account.

▷ With the Professional navigation system:"Satellite images"Depending on availability and resolution,satellite images* are displayed at scales ofapprox. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to1,000 km.

▷ With the Professional navigation system:"Perspective view in 3D"Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas thatare contained in the navigation data are dis‐played on the map in 3D.

▷ "Traffic situation/gray map"The map is optimized for displaying trafficbulletins. Symbols for the special destina‐tions are no longer displayed.

With the Professional navigationsystem: Map view for split screenThe map view can be selected for the splitscreen independently from the main screen.

1. Open "Options".2. "Split screen"

The split screen is switched on.3. Tilt the controller to the right until the split

screen contents are selected.4. Select the map view.

Seite 164


Navig

atio

n

▷ "Map facing north"▷ "Map direction of travel"▷ "Map view with perspective"

5. To change the scale: change to the splitscreen and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins*At a glance▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐

tions that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes‐sage Channel) of a traffic information serv‐ice. Information on traffic obstructions andhazards is updated continuously.Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐gation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system hasthis capability the following additional termsand conditions apply:An End-User shall no longer have the rightto use the Traffic Data in the event that theEnd-User is in material breach of the termsand conditions contained herein.A. Total Traffic Network, a division of ClearChannel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total TrafficNetwork”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐cident data and RDS-TMC network throughwhich it is delivered. You may not modify,copy, scan or use any other method to re‐produce, duplicate, republish, transmit ordistribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐cident data. You agree to indemnify, defendand hold harmless BMW of North America,LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) againstany and all claims, damages, costs or otherexpenses that arise directly or indirectly outof (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)your violation of this directive and/or (c) anyunauthorized or unlawful activities by you inconnection herewith.B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐mational only. User assumes all risk of use.Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their

suppliers make no representations aboutcontent, traffic and road conditions, routeusability, or speed.C. The licensed material is provided to li‐censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total TrafficNetwork, including, but not limited to, anyand all third party providers of any of the li‐censed material, expressly disclaims, to thefullest extent permitted by law, all warrantiesor representations with respect to the li‐censed material (including, without limita‐tion, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or thatthe traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐plied or statutory, including, without limita‐tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐bility, non-infringement fitness for aparticular purpose, or those arising from acourse of dealing or usage of trade.D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. orBMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐dental damages (including, without limita‐tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, orprofits relating to the same) arising from anyclaim relating directly or indirectly to use ofthe traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of thepossibility of such damages. These limita‐tions apply to all claims, including, withoutlimitation, claims in contract and tort (suchas negligence, product liability and strict li‐ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐tial damages, so those particular limitationsmay not apply to you.

▷ The traffic information is displayed in themap.

Switching the reception on/off1. "Navigation"2. Open "Options".3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Opening the traffic bulletins1. "Navigation"

Seite 165


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

2. "Map"Move the controller to the left.

Select the symbol.3. "Traffic Info"

First, the traffic bulletins on the plannedroute are displayed.The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order oftheir distance from the current vehicle posi‐tion.

4. Select a traffic bulletin. Select the symbol to obtain additional

information.

Traffic bulletins in the mapWhen the traffic situation/gray card is activated,the view on the Control Display is switched overto shades of gray. This enables a better view ofthe traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is dis‐regarded in this setting. Symbols and specialdestinations are not displayed.

1. "Navigation"2. "Map"3. Open "Options".4. "Settings"5. "Traffic situation/gray map"

Symbols in the map viewDepending on the scale of the map and the lo‐cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐played.

Additional information in the map viewDepending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐tion's length, direction, and impact are displayedin the map using triangles or gray bars along thecalculated route.

Filtering of traffic bulletinsSet which traffic bulletins are to be displayed inthe map.

1. "Navigation"2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".4. "Traffic Info categories"5. Set the filter.

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐played in the map.▷ Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route

are always displayed.▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐

tify you of potentially dangerous situations,such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐den.

Traffic bulletins during destinationguidance▷ "Dynamic guidance", refer to page 162

This feature influences the behavior of thesystem.

▷ During destination guidance, obstructionson the route are taken into consideration.

▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐less of the setting.

Traffic obstructionsThe system calculates the optimized route, tak‐ing into consideration traffic obstructions androad types.

Selecting a detourSet whether traffic obstructions should be takeninto consideration during route planning.

1. "Navigation"2. "Traffic Info"3. Select a traffic obstruction that you wish to

bypass.4. "Recomm. detour"

Seite 166


Navig

atio

n

Taking traffic obstructions intoconsideration1. "Navigation"2. "Traffic Info"3. First, the traffic bulletins on the planned

route are displayed. The traffic bulletins aresorted in the order of their distance from thecurrent vehicle position.

4. Select "Recomm. detour", if necessary."Dynamic guidance" is activated automati‐cally.

Navigation dataInformation on navigation data1. "Navigation"2. Open "Options".3. "Navigation system version" information is

displayed on the data version.

Updating the navigation data

General informationNavigation data and authorization codes areavailable from your service center. Navigationdata are stored in the vehicle and can be up‐dated.▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐

date may take several hours.▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.▷ The basic navigation is available during the

trip.▷ The status of the update can be queried in

the options menu.▷ The system restarts after the update.▷ The data carrier with the navigation data can

be removed after the update is complete.

Professional navigation system:Perform the update1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.

3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.

After an interruption of the trip, follow the in‐structions on the Control Display.

What to do if...▷ The current transmission position cannot be

displayed?The vehicle is located in an unrecognizedregion, is in a poor reception area, or thesystem is currently determining the posi‐tion. Reception is usually best when youhave an unobstructed view of the sky.

▷ The destination without street information isnot used for route guidance?When city has been input, no downtown canbe determined.Input any street in the selected city and startdestination guidance.

▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐ance?The destination data is not contained in thenavigation data. Select a destination that isas close as possible to the original.

▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐lected?The stored data do not contain the data ofthe destination.Select a goal that is as close as possible tothe original.

▷ The map view is shown in shades of gray?When the traffic situation/gray card is acti‐vated, the view on the Control Display isswitched over to shades of gray. This ena‐bles a better view of the traffic bulletins.

▷ Spoken instructions are no longer outputduring route guidance in front of intersec‐tions?The area has not yet been fully recorded, oryou have left the recommended route and

Seite 167


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

the system requires a few seconds to cal‐culate a new route suggestion.

Seite 168


Navig

atio

n

Seite 169


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

EntertainmentThe chapter helps assure your enjoyment when

receiving radio and television stations and playingCDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.


ToneGeneral informationThe sound settings are stored for the remotecontrol currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, andfader▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. To adjust: turn the controller.5. To confirm: press the controller.

Equalizer*Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.

Adjusting the equalizer1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"2. "Tone"3. "Equalizer"4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.6. To store: press the controller.

Multi-channel playback,surround*Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐back, surround.

Setting multi-channel playback,surround1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"2. "Tone"3. "Surround"

Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulatedwhen playing back an audio track in stereo.

Seite 172


Tone

Multi-channel playback is automatically acti‐vated or deactivated, depending on the audiotrack selected.

Volume▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume

control.▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared

to the entertainment sound output.▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the

safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐tertainment sound output.

Adjusting the volume1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"2. "Tone"3. "Volume settings"4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"2. "Tone"3. "Reset"

Seite 173


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

RadioControls

1 Change entertainment sources2 Change station/track3 Programmable memory buttons4 Volume, on/off5 Change wave band

AM/FM stationSelecting a station1. "Radio"2. "FM" or "AM"3. Select the desired station.

All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐trol currently in use.

Changing the station via the buttonPress the button.

Storing a station1. "Radio"2. "FM" or "AM"3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period.5. Select the desired memory location.The stations are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.The stations can also be stored on the program‐mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Selecting a station manuallyStation selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio"2. "FM" or "AM"3. "Manual"4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.

To store the station: press the controller for anextended period.

Seite 174


Radi

o

RDS*RDS broadcasts additional information, such asthe station name, in the FM wave band. Whenplaying a station with multiple frequencies, thesystem automatically switches to the frequencywith the best reception, if needed.

Switching the RDS on/off1. "Radio"2. "FM"3. Open "Options".4. "RDS"


HD Radio™ reception*Many stations broadcast both analog and digitalsignals.License conditionsHD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HDRadio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐uity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radioreception1. "Radio"2. "FM" or "AM"3. Open "Options".4. "HD Radio Reception"The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

This symbol is displayed in the status linewhen the audio signal is digital.

In areas in which the station is not continuouslyreceived in digital mode, the playback switchesbetween analog and digital reception. Due totime delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐titions or interruptions. In this case, switch offdigital radio reception.

Displaying additional informationSome stations broadcast additional informationon the current track, such as the name of the ar‐tist.

1. Select the desired station.2. Open "Options".3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station also

broadcasts additional substations. The stationname of the main station ends in HD1. Stationnames of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.2. Press the controller.3. Select the substation.When reception is poor, the substation is mutedfor several seconds. If reception is interruptedfor an extended period, it switches back to themain station.

Weather Band*General informationThe availability of the Weather Band and thenumber of available channels can vary depend‐ing on the region.

Switching on the Weather Band1. "Radio"2. "Weather band"3. Select the desired channel.

Additional informationWeather Band is a service of the National Oce‐anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

Seite 175


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Additional information on the Internet:www.nws.noaa.gov.

Satellite radio*General informationThe channels are offered in predefined pack‐ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐phone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Open the My Favorites category/open a favorite.

Manage the favorites.

Traffic Jump

The functions of the navigation bar symbols canalso be stored on the programmable memorybuttons, refer to page 23.

Managing a subscriptionTo be able to enable or unsubscribe from thechannels, you must have reception. It is usuallyat its best when you have an unobstructed viewof the sky. The channel name is displayed in thestatus line.

Enabling channelsThe Unsubscribed Channels category containsall disabled channels.

1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐gory.

5. Select the desired channel.The phone number and an electronic serialnumber, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels againvia this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. Open "Options".4. "Manage subscription"

Seite 176


Radi

o

5. The phone number and an electronic serialnumber, ESN, are displayed.

6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐nels.

Selecting channelsYou can only listen to enabled channels.The selected channel is stored for the remotecontrol currently in use.

Via the iDrive1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐

gory.4. Select the desired channel.

Via the buttons on the center consolePress the button.The next channel is selected.

Via direct channel entry1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. "Select channel"4. Turn the controller until the desired channel


Storing a channel1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐

sired category.4. Select the desired channel.

5. Press the controller again.6. Press the controller again to confirm the

highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location.The channels are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.The channels can also be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Changing the list viewThe list view changes every time the first symbolon the navigation bar is pressed.Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Meaning

Channel name

Artist

Track

Selecting a category1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. "Category"4. Select the desired category.

TimeshiftApprox. one hour of the program being broad‐cast on the channel currently being listened tois stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal mustbe available.The stored audio track can be played with a de‐lay following the live broadcast. When the bufferis full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Seite 177


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Opening the timeshift function1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. "Replay - Time shift"

▷ The red arrow shows the current playbackposition.

▷ The time difference to the live broadcast isdisplayed next to the buffer bar.For live transmissions: "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐tivated

Automatic timeshiftWhen the function is activated, audio playbackis stopped automatically in the event of:▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.▷ Activation of the voice activation system.▷ Muting.The audio playback then continues with a timedelay.To activate:

1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. "Replay - Time shift"4. "Automatic time shift"To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".

Storing favoritesUp to 30 favorites can be stored in the favoriteslist. Available favorites are artist, track, game,league, and team.

Storing the artist, track, or gameIt is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐rently being broadcast. The channel informationmust be available.

1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐

sired category.4. Select the desired channel.5. Press the controller again.6. Select the artist, track, or game.

Storing the league or teamLeagues or teams can be added to the favoritesfrom a selection list.

1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. "Manage favorites"4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the league.6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Seite 178


Radi

o

Opening the favoritesIf an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐onds: "Favorite alert!".

"Favorites"Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played.If there is no message, the system changes tothe My Favorites category. All favorites currentlybeing broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favoritesFavorites can be activated and deactivatedglobally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"2. "Manage favorites"3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐

ites.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Deleting favorites1. "Satellite radio"2. "Manage favorites"3. Highlight the desired favorite.4. Open "Options".5. "Delete entry"

Traffic JumpTraffic and weather information for a selectedregion is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. Open "Options".4. "Set jump"5. Select the desired region.The region is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump1. "Radio"2. "Satellite radio"3. "Jump to:"Information for the selected region is broadcastas soon as it is available.A new panel opens.Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broad‐cast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate TrafficJump.

Automatic updateAbout twice a year, Sirius performs an update ofthe channel names and positions. The updatetakes place automatically and may take severalminutes.

Notes▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐

uations, such as under certain environmen‐tal or topographic conditions. The satelliteradio has no influence on this.

▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels orunderground garages; next to tall buildings;or near trees, mountains or other powerfulsources of radio interference.

Seite 179


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Stored stationsGeneral informationIt is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station1. "Radio"2. "Presets"3. Select the desired station.

Storing a stationThe station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio"2. "Presets"3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location.The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐mote control currently in use.The stations can also be stored on the program‐mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Deleting a station1. "Radio"2. "Presets"3. Select the desired station.4. Open "Options".5. "Delete entry"

Seite 180


Radi

o

CD/multimediaControls

1 Change the entertainment source2 CD/DVD* drive3 Eject CD/DVD4 Change station/track5 Programmable memory buttons6 Volume, on/off

CD/DVD*CD/DVD playback

Loading the CD/DVD* playerInsert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.Playback begins automatically.Reading can take a few minutes with com‐pressed audio files.

Starting playbackThere is a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player orchanger.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD:

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD* player

... DVD changer*

CD/DVD player, rear*

Playable formats▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-

RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVDaudio (video part only), DVD video*.

▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,VCD*, SVCD*.

▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the buttonPress the button repeatedly until thedesired track is played.

Seite 181


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Selecting the track using the iDrive

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio filesDepending on the data, some letters and num‐bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐rectly.

1. Select the directory if necessary.To change to a higher level directory: movethe controller to the left.

2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information on the track

If information about a track has been stored, it isdisplayed automatically:▷ Interpret.▷ Album track.▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.▷ File name of track.

Random playback1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select the desired CD or DVD.4. Open "Options".5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: alltracks within the selected directory are played inrandom order.Random mode is switched off when the audiosource is changed and the ignition is switchedoff.

Fast forward/reversePress and hold the button.

Seite 182


CD/m

ultim

edia

Automatic repeat*The selected track, directories, or CDs/DVDsare repeated automatically.

Video playback*

Country codesOnly DVDs with the code of the home region canbe played back; also refer to the information onthe DVD.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐rica

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America,New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

PlaybackThe video image is displayed on the front Con‐trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only displayed if theparking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐mission is in position P.

DVD video1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select a DVD with video content.

4. "DVD menu"

VCD/SVCD1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select a CD with video content.4. "Select track"5. Select the desired track.

Video menuTo open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐ing playback.Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

Symbol Function

Open the DVD menu.

Start playback.

Pause

Stop

Next chapter

Previous chapter

Fast forward

Reverse

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, startplayback.

DVD menu1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

video menu.2. "DVD menu"

Seite 183


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐pends on the contents of the DVD.

3. To select menu items: move the controllerand press it.

To change to the video menu: turn the controllerand press it.

DVD/VCD settingsFor some DVDs, settings can only be made viathe DVD menu; refer also to the information onthe DVD.

Selecting the language*The languages that are available depend on theDVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.2. Open "Options".3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

Selecting the subtitles*The subtitles that are available depend on theDVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.2. Open "Options".3. "Subtitles"

4. Select the desired language or "Do notdisplay subtitles".

Setting the brightness, contrast and color1. Turn the controller during playback.2. Open "Options".3. "Display settings"4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired settingis reached and press the controller.

Selecting the zoomDisplay the video image on the entire screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback.2. Open "Options".3. "Additional options"4. "Zoom mode"

Seite 184


CD/m

ultim

edia

Selecting a trackDVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu isdisplayed.

2. Open "Options".3. "Additional options"4. "Select title"5. Select the desired track.VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"2. Select the desired track.

Selecting the camera angle*The availability of a different camera angle de‐pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback.2. Open "Options".3. "Additional options"4. "Viewing angle"5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, backThese functions are not contained on everyDVD. Therefore, they may not be available foruse.

DVD changer*

In the glove compartment

Pull down the release cover.The DVD changer tilts down.To close: fold the DVD changer up until it en‐gages.

Fold up the DVD changerAlways fold the DVD changer back up after

filling and emptying it; otherwise, the DVDchanger could be damaged.◀

Controls and displays

1 Empty DVD compartments2 LED on DVD slot3 Buttons for DVD compartments4 DVD slot5 Fill DVD compartments

Filling the DVD compartmentsindividually

1. Press the button.The LED on the first empty compartmentflashes.

2. Select another compartment if necessary.3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.

The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically andplaced into the selected compartment.

Sliding in CDs/DVDsDo not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; thismay cause it to jam and prevent it from beingable to eject again.◀

Filling all empty DVD compartments

1. Hold the button down.

Seite 185


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

The LEDs on the empty CD compartmentsflash.

2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flashand then insert a CD or DVD into the center.The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automaticallyand placed into the vacant compartments.

Sliding in CDs/DVDsDo not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; thismay cause it to jam and prevent it from beingable to eject again.◀After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.

Removing a single CD/DVD

1. Press the button.2. Select the DVD compartment.

The CD/DVD is partially ejected.3. Remove the CD/DVD.

Removing all CDs/DVDs

1. Hold the button down.2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.

MalfunctionsIf all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap‐idly, a malfunction has occurred.To eliminate the malfunction:

1. Press one of the buttons:▷

▷

The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.2. Remove the CD/DVD.The DVD changer is functional again after theLEDs stop flashing rapidly.

Audio playback*The audio track of a DVD can be played backeven if video playback is not possible in the ve‐hicle.Only the main film without the previews or extrascan be played back.

Starting playbackA DVD is located in the DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select the desired DVD.

Selecting a chapter using the buttonPress the button repeatedly until thedesired chapter is played.

Selecting a chapter using iDrive1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select the desired DVD.4. Select the desired chapter.

Fast forward/reversePress and hold the button.

Selecting the language*The languages that are available depend on theDVD.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select the desired DVD.4. Open "Options".5. "Audio/language"6. Select the desired language.

Notes

CD/DVD player and changerDo not remove the cover

Seite 186


CD/m

ultim

edia

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are offi‐cially designated Class 1 laser products. Do notoperate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, se‐vere eye damage may occur.◀

CDs and DVDsUse of CDs/DVDs▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs

with labels applied, as these can be‐come detached during playback dueto heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐able damage to the device.

▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standarddiameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not playCDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jamand no longer eject.

▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVDPlus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will nolonger eject.◀

General malfunctions▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. Insome instances they may be more sensitiveto faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary deviceswould be.

▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first checkwhether it has been inserted correctly.

HumidityHigh levels of humidity can lead to condensationon the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, andtemporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/DVDsIf malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/DVDs, this can be due to one of the followingcauses:

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with

home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistentdata creation or recording processes, orpoor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.

▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side witha pen intended for this purpose.

Damage▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture.▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures

over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or directsunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protectionCDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐tection feature by the manufacturer. This canmean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played orcan only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISIONThis product contains copyrighted technologythat is based on multiple registered US patentsand the intellectual property of the MacrovisionCorporation and other manufacturers. The useof this copy protection must be approved byMacrovision. Media protected by this product -unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - mayonly be used for private purposes. Copying ofthis technology is prohibited.

Music collection*Storing music

General informationMusic tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devicescan be stored in the music collection on a harddisc in the vehicle and played from there.▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐

pressed audio format. If available, informa‐tion on the album, such as the artist, isstored as well.

▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressedaudio files: the entire content of the CD/DVDor the USB device is stored in the vehicle asan album. The WMA, MP3, and AAC formatsare stored. Individual tracks and directories

Seite 187


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

can be deleted later, Deleting a track and di‐rectory, refer to page 191.Tracks with DRM copy protection can bestored but cannot be played back.

Backing up music dataRegularly back up the music data; other‐

wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the harddisk.◀

Music recognition technology and re‐lated data are provided by Gracenote®.

Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐ognition technology and related content deliv‐ery. For more information, please visitwww.gracenote.com.CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote.This product and service may practice one ormore of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐ing. Some services supplied under license fromOpen Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Storing from a CD/DVD1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.2. "CD/Multimedia"3. "CD/DVD"4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed and the firsttrack of the CD/DVD is played back. During thestorage process, the tracks are played in se‐quence.

Observe the following during the storage proc‐ess:Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do notremove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player asthis will interrupt the storage process. You canswitch to the other audio sources without inter‐rupting the storage process. Tracks from thecurrent CD/DVD that have already been storedcan be called up.

Interrupting storage1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing"The storage process is interrupted and can becontinued at any time.

Continuing the storage process1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "CD/DVD"3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.4. "Continue storing"Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐ning of the track at which storage was inter‐rupted.

Album informationDuring storage, information such as the name ofthe artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐tion is available in the vehicle database or on theCD.To update the database, contact your servicecenter.

Seite 188


CD/m

ultim

edia

Storing from a USB deviceTo store music, a suitable device must be con‐nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐partment.▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐

ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 playerswith a USB interface.

▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USBhubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music fromthe Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via theUSB audio interface in the center armrest.

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐face in the glove compartment, refer topage 140.

2. "CD/Multimedia"3. "Music collection"4. Open "Options".5. "Music data import/export"6. "Import music (USB)"

Playing music

Music searchAll tracks for which additional information hasbeen stored can be accessed by the musicsearch. Tracks without additional informationcan be called up via the corresponding album,refer to page 190.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"

3. "Music search"

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired entry.▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,

and input the desired entry.▷ Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish.The tracks found are listed in alphabeticalorder.Not all categories need to be selected. Forexample, to search for all tracks by a certainartist, call up that artist only. All of the tracksby that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

Restarting the music search"New search"

Music search using spoken instructions*Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐fer to page 25.


Seite 189


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

2. ›Music search‹3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select

artist‹.4. Say the desired entry in the list.5. Select other categories if you wish.To select a track directly: ›Title ... ‹.Say the spoken instruction and the name of thedesired track in a single sentence.

Current playbackList of tracks that was generated last by the mu‐sic search or the album selected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50The 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. "Top 50"4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

AlbumsAll stored albums, listed in order of their storagedates.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or thesubdirectories of the album are displayed.The first track is played automatically, if pos‐sible.

4. Change directories if needed to selecttracks.To go up a level in the directory: move thecontroller to the left.

Random playbackAll tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Open "Options".4. "Random"

Seite 190


CD/m

ultim

edia

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album*The name of the album, if available, is automat‐ically entered when the album is stored. If thename is unknown it can be changed later ifneeded.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Highlight the desired album.4. Open "Options".5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an albumAn album cannot be deleted while a track fromthat album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Highlight the desired album.4. Open "Options".5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directoryA track cannot be deleted while it is beingplayed.A directory cannot be deleted while a track fromthat directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Highlight the directory or track.

4. Open "Options".5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Free memory capacityDisplay the free memory capacity in the musiccollection.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Open "Options".4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collectionThe entire music collection can be stored on aUSB device. Make sure there is enough freememory capacity on the USB device.Depending on the number of tracks, backing upthe music collection may take several hours.Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐ing a long trip.

1. Starting the engine.2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐

face in the glove compartment, refer topage 140.

3. "CD/Multimedia"4. "Music collection"5. Open "Options".6. "Music data import/export"

Seite 191


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

7. "Backup music on USB"

Storing the music collection in the vehicleWhen storing from the USB device, the existingmusic collection in the vehicle is replaced.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Open "Options".4. "Music data import/export"5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "Music collection"3. Open "Options".4. "Delete music collection"

External devicesAt a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface*/mobile phoneaudio interface*

Rear AUX-IN port*

Rear AUX-IN port on the right*

AUX-IN port

At a glance▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicleloudspeakers.

▷ Recommendation: use medium tone andvolume settings on the audio device. Thetone depends on the quality of the audiofiles.

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.Connect the headphones or line-out connectorof the device to the jack plug.

Playback1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.2. "CD/Multimedia"3. If necessary, "External devices"4. "AUX front"

VolumeThe volume of the sound output is dependenton the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐edly from the volume of the other audio sources,it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume1. "CD/Multimedia"2. If necessary, "External devices"3. "AUX front"

Seite 192


CD/m

ultim

edia

4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volumeis set and press the controller.

USB audio interface*/mobile phoneaudio interface*

At a glanceIt is possible to connect external audio devices.They can be operated on the iDrive. The soundis output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connectors for external devices▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones thatare supported by the USB audio interface.

▷ Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐ped with extended connectivity of the musicplayer in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone ormobile phones.Playback is only possible if no connector isplugged into the USB audio interface.

Due to the large number of different audio devi‐ces available on the market, it cannot be ensuredthat every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐ble on the vehicle.Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐vices/mobile phones.

Audio filesStandard audio files can be played back:▷ MP3.▷ WMA.▷ WAV (PCM).

▷ AAC.▷ Playback lists: M3U.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone viaUSB audio interface

The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.To connect the device, use the special cableadapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, availablefrom your service center. The cable adapter isrequired for a good connection.

Use the cable adapter for the AppleiPod/iPhone to connect the AppleiPod/iPhone with the AUX-IN portand the USB interface.The Apple iPod/iPhone menu

structure is supported by the USB audio inter‐face.

Connection of a USB device via theUSB audio interface

The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protectthe USB audio interface and the USB deviceagainst physical damage.

Seite 193


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Connect the USB device to theUSB interface.

After connecting for the first timeInformation on all music tracks, e.g. artist or typeof music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,depending on the USB device and the numberof tracks.During transmission, the tracks can be called upvia the file directory.

Number of tracksInformation from up to four USB devices or forapprox. 16,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐ing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protectionMusic tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Select the symbol.

The playback starts with the first track.When an Apple iPhone is connected via thesnap-in adapter and an audio device is con‐nected to the AUX-IN port at the same time, theaudio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.On the Splitscreen*, the CD cover for the musictrack might be displayed after a few seconds.

Track searchSelection is possible via:▷ Playback lists.▷ Information: type of music, artist, album,

track.▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,

composer.Tracks are displayed if they have been saved inthe Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or

"Artist".All entries are displayed in a list.▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐

sired entry. When a letter is entered, theresults are filtered using this letter as thefirst letter. If multiple letters are entered,all results that contain that sequence aredisplayed.

▷ Select the desired entry from the list.

5. Select other categories if you wish.Not all categories need to be selected. Forexample, if all of the tracks by a certain artistare to be displayed, call up that artist only.All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐played.

6. "Start play"

Restarting a track search"New search"

Seite 194


CD/m

ultim

edia

Playback listsCalling up playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Select the symbol.4. "Playlists"

Current playbackList of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Select the symbol.4. "Current playback"

Random playbackThe current list of tracks is played back in ran‐dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Open "Options".4. "Random"

Fast forward/reversePress and hold the button for the cor‐responding direction.

NotesDo not expose the audio device to extreme en‐vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐peratures; refer to the audio device operatinginstructions.Depending on the configuration of the audiofiles, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, thefiles may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection▷ The connected audio device is supplied with

a max. power of 500 mA if supported by thedevice. Therefore, do not connect the de‐vice to the power socket in the vehicle.

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐nector into the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans orlamps to the USB audio interface.

▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the audio interface to recharge

external devices.

Seite 195


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Rear entertainment*Controls

1 Screen, left2 Screen, right3 Center armrest, remote control4 CD/DVD player

Rear CD/DVD player

1 CD/DVD slot2 Eject CD/DVD3 On/off, right4 Headphone connection, right5 RCA sockets6 Headphone connection, left7 On/off, left

Switching the system on/offPress the left or right side of the buttonon the CD/DVD player in the rear for the

respective page.

Rear entertainment and screens are switchedon/off.After switching off the ignition, the system mustbe switched on again.

ScreensAdjusting

Danger of burns when screen is folded outDo not reach behind the screen; other‐

wise, there is the danger of getting burned. Theback of the screen can become very hot.◀

▷ To fold out: pull at the bottom edge.▷ To fold in: press against the bottom edge.

Notes▷ Do not cover lower screen edge, since this

is where the sensors and the infrared inter‐face are installed.

▷ When loading the rear seats and adjustingthe backrest of the front seat, fold in thescreens.

▷ When using the through-loading system,fold the screens down.

▷ When cleaning the screen, follow the careinstructions, refer to page 253.

Seite 196


Rear

ent

erta

inm

ent

Remote controlIn the center armrest in the rear

Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po‐sition in the center armrest.

Menu navigation

Press the but‐ton

Function

Operating concept as for thefront controller.Turn the wheel: highlight amenu item.Press the center knob: con‐firm the selection.Press the arrow buttons:change between panels.

Opens the main menu.

Displays the previous menu.

Opens the "Options" menu.

Changes the station, track orchapter.Press and hold the button:fast forward/reverse.

Press the but‐ton

Function

Adjusts the volume.

Switches the volume adjust‐ment to the left/right.For Rear seat entertainmentProfessional*: Switch overbetween the display screens.

The transmission time of the remote control islimited by law. To execute a function again,press or turn the required button again.

Replacing the batteriesNo rechargeable batteriesDo not use rechargeable batteries, as

damage may result from the substances in thebatteries.◀

1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar‐row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.

2. Insert batteries of the same type.3. Close the cover.

Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐ter or to your service center.

ControlsAlmost all functions can be operated in the samemanner as they are in the front. Special featuresof operating the system in the rear are describedhere.

Seite 197


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Audio/video playback

AudioAudio can be played back via rear entertainmentfrom any source in the vehicle.Operation is the same as for the front audio play‐back, refer to page 181.

VideoVideo can be played back in the rear from thefollowing sources:▷ DVD changer*.▷ Rear CD/DVD player.▷ External device in rear.If a video image is being played back in the rear,the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected inthe front.Operation is the same as for the front video play‐back, refer to page 183.

RadioWhen the same radio source is selected in thefront and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta‐tion is played.Operation is the same as for the front radio, referto page 174.

CD/multimedia

CD/DVDWhen the same audio source (front CD/DVDplayer, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se‐lected in the front and rear, the same material isplayed.Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD,refer to page 181.Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 186.

Music collection*Music can only be stored and data can only beexported and imported via the front CD/DVDplayer or the USB interface in the glove com‐partment.

When music collections are selected in the frontand rear, they are played back separately.Operation is the same as for the front music col‐lection, refer to page 187.

ToneOnly treble and bass can be set in the rear. Thesettings are made separately for the left andright headphones.Operation is the same as for the front tone, referto page 172.

Contacts*Operation is the same as for the front contacts,refer to page 213.

Navigation*Route planning can be performed separately onthe left and right sides in the rear. Destinationguidance can only be started from the front.Operation is the same as for the front navigation,refer to page 154.

Suggesting a destinationA destination or trip can be sent to the front asa suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted,stored, or declined in the front. This function isnot available with the following setting: "Drivercontrol".

1. Enter the destination.2. "Suggest destination"

BMW Assist*Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in thefront, refer to page 216.

AdjustingThe following settings are available:▷ "Rear displays"▷ "Language/Units": language can be set

globally for all screens.▷ "Tone"▷ If necessary, "Climate"

Seite 198


Rear

ent

erta

inm

ent

Vehicle information*Computer content can be displayed. Operationis only possible in the front.

Options menuThe split screen is not available and there is nointegrated Owner's Manual.Operation is the same as for the front menu op‐tions, refer to page 21.

EnablingEnabling operation in the rearOnly possible via the iDrive in the front.

1. "Settings"2. "Allow rear control"3. Select the desired priority.

Priority options

The driver has priority▷ The source selected via iDrive in the front is

output on the vehicle loudspeakers and canbe selected but not operated from the rear.Other audio or video sources can be oper‐ated.

▷ Sound can only be output in the rear viaheadphones.

▷ The source that is to be displayed in the rearcan be set via the iDrive in the front.

To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in thefront:

1. Open "Options".

2. "Select rear source"3. Select the desired audio or video source.

Same priority▷ All audio and video sources can be operated

via the iDrive in the front and rear.▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:

the source selected via the iDrive in the frontis output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: thesource selected last via the iDrive in the frontor rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐ers.

The rear has priority▷ When the source selected in the rear is

played on headphones, it can be selectedbut not operated via iDrive in the front. Otheraudio or video sources can be operated.

▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:the source selected via the iDrive in the frontis output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: thesource selected in the rear is output on thevehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour‐ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in thefront.

Switching off the rear DVD▷ Rear entertainment is switched off.▷ To switch rear entertainment back on: select

a different priority via the iDrive in the frontand switch on the system, refer topage 196.

Headphones, vehicleloudspeakersConnecting the headphones

Normal headphonesConnect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer topage 196, on the rear CD/DVD player.

Seite 199


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Infrared headphonesConnection via the infrared interface on thelower edge of the screen.Fitting infrared headphones and information onwhich headphones are supported can be ob‐tained from your service center.When using infrared headphones, ensure thatthe connection between the headphones andthe infrared interface is not disrupted:▷ Do not place an obstacle between the inter‐

face and headphones.▷ Do not cover the interface.▷ Do not scratch the interface.Fold up display screens for interference-free re‐ception.Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am‐bient light can impair reception.

Sound output on the headphones orvehicle loudspeakersOperation is only possible in the rear.

1. Open "Options".2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers"With the following setting, sound output in therear is not possible via the vehicle speakers:"Driver control".

External devicesGeneral informationExternal audio and video devices and digitalcameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re‐fer to page 196, on the CD/DVD player. Opera‐tion takes place on the external device.Due to the large number of different audio andvideo devices available on the market, it cannotbe ensured that every audio and video devicewill be displayed correctly on the screen.

Connecting an external device1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch

sockets on the CD/DVD player.

2. Connect the external device to the RCAsockets.▷ Video: yellow socket.▷ Audio: white and red socket.

Starting playback1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Select the or symbol.

VolumeThe volume of the sound output is dependenton the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐edly from the volume of the other audio sources,it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volumeThe volume can only be adjusted if no externalvideo device is connected.

1. "CD/Multimedia"2. "External devices"3. Select the or symbol.4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volumeis set and press the controller.

Seite 200


Rear

ent

erta

inm

ent

What to do if...▷ Only a black screen is visible.

Switch on the system.▷ There are no options available on the

screen.Replace remote control batteries.With Professional rear seat entertainmenttoggle between screens if necessary.

▷ Radio stations or TV channels are grayedout and can not be selected.Function is limited due to the selected pri‐ority. Change priority.

▷ The DVD does not play.Playback does not begin automatically.Start DVD manually, refer to page 183.

▷ The volume of the rear vehicle speakerscannot be adjusted.Sound in the rear is output via the head‐phones. Change priority if necessary andoutput sound via vehicle speakers.

Seite 201


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

CommunicationAll of the options available to you for mobile

communication with family, friends, businesspartners, and service providers are described in

this chapter.


Telephone*At a glanceThe conceptAfter the mobile phone is paired once with thevehicle, the mobile phone can be operated usingthe iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spo‐ken instructions.A paired mobile phone is automatically detectedas soon as it is located inside the vehicle, whenthe ignition is switched on.Up to four mobile phones can be paired.

Using the mobile phone while drivingMake entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phonein your hand while you are driving; use thehands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐hicle occupants and other road users.◀

Snap-in adapter*The snap-in adapter is used to:▷ Hold the mobile phone.▷ Recharge the battery.▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐

tenna of the vehicle.This provides for better network receptionand consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phonesInquire with your service center which mobilephones containing a Bluetooth interface aresupported by the mobile phone preparationpackage. Additional information can be found atwww.bmw.com/bluetooth.These approved mobile phones with a certainsoftware version, support the vehicle functionsdescribed below.Malfunctions may occur with other mobilephones or software versions.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is connectedto the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, asthis may lead to a malfunction.

Pairing/unpairing the mobilephoneRequirements▷ The mobile phone is suitable.▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to

page 205, and on the mobile phone.▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made

on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connectionwithout confirmation or visibility, refer to themobile phone operating instructions.

▷ A number with at least four and a maximumof 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐key. It is only required once for pairing.

▷ The ignition is switched on.

Pairing and connectingPairing the mobile phoneTo avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐cle's occupants and to other road users, onlypair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐tionary.◀Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con‐trol Display.

1. "Telephone"2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"3. "Add new phone"

Seite 204


Tele

phon

e

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobilephone, refer to the mobile phone operatinginstructions: for instance, search for or con‐nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appearson the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle onthe mobile phone display.You are prompted by the iDrive or mobilephone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

6. Enter the passkey and confirm.

If the pairing was successful, the mobile phoneappears at the top of the list of mobile phones.Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐hicle at once.If pairing was unsuccessful: what to do if, referto page 206.

Following the initial pairing▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine isrunning or the ignition is switched on.

▷ After they have been identified, phone bookentries are transferred from the SIM card

and/or mobile phone to the vehicle; this de‐pends on the mobile phone.

▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some

mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐cure connection; refer to the mobile phoneoperating instructions.

Activating/deactivating BluetoothBluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Complywith all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"2. Open "Options".3. "Bluetooth"

Connecting a particular mobile phoneIf more than one mobile phone is detected by thevehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list isconnected. A different mobile phone can beconnected by selecting it.

1. "Telephone"2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐

nected.

Seite 205


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Unpairing the mobile phone1. "Telephone"2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐

paired.4. Open "Options".5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if...Not all phone book entries are displayed.▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete; note the display in the sta‐tus field.

▷ It may only be possible to transmit the phonebook entries on the SIM card* or the mobilephone.

▷ It may not be possible to display phone bookentries with special characters.

▷ The number of phone book entries to bestored is too high.

The mobile phone cannot be paired.▷ Is the mobile phone supported? For infor‐

mation, contact your service center.▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile

phone and the vehicle match? Enter thesame passkey on the mobile phone and viaiDrive.

▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enterthe passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connectedto the mobile phone? If so, delete the con‐nections with other devices on the mobilephone.

▷ The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switchthe mobile phone off and on again.

▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.▷ If all items on the list have been checked and

the mobile phone still cannot be paired,please contact Customer Relations.

ControlsIncoming call

Receiving callsIf the number of the caller is stored in the phonebook and is transmitted by the network, thename of the contact is displayed.

Accepting a call

Via the button on the steering wheelPress the button.

Via the instrument cluster"Accept"

Via the iDrive"Accept"

Rejecting a call

Via the instrument cluster"Reject"

Via the iDrive"Reject"

Seite 206


Tele

phon

e

Ending a call

Via the button on the steering wheelPress the button.

Via the instrument cluster"End call"

Via the iDrive1. "Telephone"2. "Active calls"3. Select an active call.

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number1. "Telephone"2. "Dial number"3. Select the digits individually.4. Select the symbol.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General informationYou can switch between calls and connect twocalls to a single conference call. These functionsmust be supported by the mobile phone andservice provider.

Accepting a call while speaking toanother partyThis function might have to be activated by theservice provider and the mobile phone must beadjusted accordingly.If a second call comes in during an active call,you will hear a call waiting signal."Accept"The call is accepted and the existing call is puton hold.

Establishing a second callEstablish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"2. "Active calls"3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it froma list.

Switching between two calls, hold callActive call: indicated by a red handset.Call on hold: indicated by a green handset.To switch to the call on hold, select this handset.

Seite 207


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Establishing a conference callTwo calls can be connected to a single tele‐phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both callsare ended. If one call is terminated by anotherparty, the other call can be continued.

Phone book

DisplaysThe phone book accesses the contacts andshows all contacts for which a phone numberhas been stored. The entries can be selected tomake a call.

1. "Telephone"2. "Phone book"All contacts with a phone number are displayed.A symbol indicates the storage location of thecontacts, refer to page 213.

Calling a contact1. Select the desired contact.

Select the symbol. Contact with onephone number. The connection is being es‐tablished.

2. Select the symbol. Contact with morethan one phone number. Select the phonenumber, the connection is being estab‐lished.

A telephone call is not possible, the mobilephone has no coverage or no network or a Serv‐ice Request is active.

Editing a contactChange the entries in "Contacts". When a con‐tact is changed, the changes are not stored onthe mobile phone. A copy of the entry is storedin the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.2. Open "Options".3. "Edit entry"The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General informationThe eight phone numbers dialed last are dis‐played.

Dialing the number via the instrumentclusterThis is possible when there is no active call.


2. Select the desired phone number.The connection is established.

Dialing the number via the iDrive1. "Telephone"2. "Redial"3. Select the desired entry.The connection is established.

Seite 208


Tele

phon

e

Deleting a single entry or all entries1. Highlight the entry.2. Open "Options".3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts1. Highlight the entry.2. Open "Options".3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"4. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"5. Complete the entries if necessary.6. If necessary. "Store contact".

Received calls

Displaying callsThe 20 calls that were last received are dis‐played.

1. "Telephone"2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the listSelecting an entry.The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries1. Highlight the entry.2. Open "Options".3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts1. Highlight the entry.2. Open "Options".3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"4. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"5. Complete the entries if necessary.6. If necessary. "Store contact".

MessagesDisplay of different messages:▷ My Info messages from the BMW Assist

portal.▷ Message from the Concierge service, refer

to page 217.

MyInfo

Starting destination guidance1. Select the message.2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."

Dialing the number in the message1. Select the message.2. "Call"

Message from the Concierge service

Using an address in destination guidance1. Select the message.2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

dest."

3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

Seite 209


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Dialing the number in the message1. Select the message.2. "Call"

Storing an address1. Select the message.2. Open "Options".3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Deleting messages1. Highlight the message.2. Open "Options".3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"

Hands-free system

General informationCalls that are being made on the hands-freesystem can be continued on the mobile phoneand vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-free systemCalls that were begun outside of the Bluetoothrange of the vehicle can be continued on thehands-free system with the ignition switchedon.Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐tomatically switches to the hands-free system.If the system does not switch over automatically,follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐play; refer also to the mobile phone operatinginstructions.

From the hands-free system to themobile phoneCalls that are made on the hands-free systemcan in some cases be continued on the mobilephone; this depends on the mobile phone.Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐play; refer also to the mobile phone operatinginstructions.

Voice operation*The concept▷ The mobile phone can be operated without

taking your hands from the steering wheel.▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied

by announcements or questions.▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice

activation system.

Using voice activation

Activating the voice activation system


2. Say the command.

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Briefly press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloudPress the button. ›Help‹. Possible commandsare announced.The digits from zero to nine are recognized. Thedigits can be spoken separately or combined ina sequence to accelerate the entry.

Using alternative commandsIn many cases, the system is able to recognizeseveral commands to execute the same func‐tion, such as the following:›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹

Example: dialing a phone number


2. ›Dial number‹The system says: »Please say the number«

Seite 210


Tele

phon

e

3. E.g., ›123 456 790‹The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?«

4. ›Dial number‹The system says: »Dialing number«

Calling

Dialing a phone number1. ›Dial number‹2. Say the phone number.3. ›Dial‹

Correcting the phone numberThe sequence of digits can be deleted after thesystem has repeated the digits.›Correct number‹The command can be repeated as often as nec‐essary.

Deleting a phone number›Delete‹All digits entered up to that point are deleted.

Redialing›Redial‹

Voice phone book*Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, itmay be necessary to create your own voicephone book.The entries must be entered using voice activa‐tion and are separate from the memory in themobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Saving an entry1. ›Save name‹2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking

duration of approx. 2 seconds.3. Say the phone number after being prompted

to do so by the system.4. ›Save‹

Deleting an entry1. ›Delete name‹2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.

Deleting all entries1. ›Delete phone book‹

The dialog for deleting the phone book isopened.

2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹.

Reading and selecting entries1. ›Read phone book‹

The dialog for reading the phone book isopened.

2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry isread.

Selecting an entry1. ›Dial name‹2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the knob during an announcement.▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.▷ The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

NotesDo not use the voice activation system to initiatean Emergency Request. In stressful situations,the voice and vocal pitch can change. This canunnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐ephone connection.Instead, use the SOS button*, refer topage 246, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Seite 211


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Environmental conditions▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language ofthe voice activation system.

▷ Keep the doors and windows closed to pre‐vent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Snap-in adapter*Installation positionIn the center armrest.

Inserting the snap-in adapter1. Press the button and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐gages.

Inserting the mobile phone

1. Depending on the mobile phone, removethe protective cap from the antenna con‐nector of the mobile phone.

2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐row 2 until it engages.

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Seite 212


Tele

phon

e

ContactsGeneral informationContacts can be created and edited. The con‐tacts from the mobile phone are displayed aswell if this function is supported by the mobilephone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐tinations for navigation and the phone numberscan be dialed directly.

New contact1. "Contacts"2. "New contact"

3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐ous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol nextto the entry field.

5. Enter the text, refer to page 24.6. When equipped with a navigation system:

Enter the address. Only addresses con‐tained in the navigation data in the vehiclecan be entered. This ensures that destina‐tion guidance is possible for all addresses.

7. If necessary, "Store".8. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying a contact as the homeaddressA contact can be stored as the home address. Itis placed at the top of "My contacts".

1. "Home"2. Create a contact.

My contactsGeneral informationA list of all contacts in the vehicle and mobilephone.

Displaying contacts1. "Contacts"2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. AnA-Z search is offered, refer to page 24, if thereare 30 or more contacts.A symbol indicates the storage location of thecontacts:

Seite 213


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has notbeen checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address hasbeen checked as a destination.

Mobile phone

Displaying the detailed viewSelect the desired contact.All fields that have been filled in for that contactare displayed.

Selecting the name displayNames can be displayed in a different order.

1. "My contacts"2. Highlight the contact.3. Open "Options".4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name"Depending on how the contacts were stored onyour mobile phone, the names may be displayeddifferently than the display selected.

Selecting the contact as a navigationdestination*1. "My contacts"2. Select the desired contact.3. Select the desired address.When contacts from the mobile phone are used,the address may need to be matched to the nav‐igation data contained in the vehicle. In this case:Correct the address.

Checking the address as adestination*An address that is to be used for destinationguidance must match the navigation data con‐tained in the vehicle. The address can bechecked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight theaddress.

2. Open "Options".3. "Check as destination"4. Correct and store the address if necessary.If the address is corrected and stored, a copy ofit is stored in the vehicle. The address is notchanged on the mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers*1. "My contacts"2. Select the desired contact.3. Select the desired phone number.The connection is established.

Editing a contact1. "My contacts"2. Select the desired contact.3. "Edit contact"

4. Change the entries.5. Move the controller to the left.6. "Yes"If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, thechanges are not stored on the mobile phone. Acopy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and onlythis copy is displayed. Under certain circum‐stances, a contact entry with the same name iscreated.

Deleting contactsOnly contacts that are stored in the vehicle aredeleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐not be deleted.

1. "My contacts"2. Highlight the contact.

Seite 214


Cont

acts

3. Open "Options".4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Exporting/importing contactsContacts can be exported and imported via thePersonal Profile, refer to page 33.

Seite 215


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

BMW AssistBMW Assist*General informationBMW Assist provides you with various services,for instance, transmission of the position data ofyour vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Cen‐ter if an Emergency Request* is initiated.Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐vidually agreed upon contract.After your contract has expired, the BMW Assistsystem will be deactivated by the BMW AssistResponse Center without your having to visit aservice center. After the BMW Assist systemhas been deactivated, no BMW Assist serviceswill be available. The BMW Assist system can bereactivated by a service center after you sign anew contract.

Requirements▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged

in to a wireless communications network.This network must be capable of transmit‐ting the services.

▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle mustbe able to determine the current position.

▷ To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPSsignal must be available.

▷ The BMW Assist service contract wassigned with your service center or with theBMW Assist Response Center. Enablingmust have been completed.

▷ BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered▷ Emergency Request: when you press the

SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐sist Response Center is established. TheBMW Assist Response Center then speakswith you and takes further steps to help you.

▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐tain conditions, a connection is establishedto the BMW Assist Response Center after a

serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐sist Response Center then speaks with youand takes further steps to help you.

▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMWRoadside Assistance* can be contacted ifassistance is needed in the event of a break‐down. If possible, the vehicle and positiondata are transmitted in the process.

▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐tomer Relations for information on all as‐pects of your vehicle.

▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's servicestatus or required inspections are transmit‐ted to your service center, either automati‐cally before a service due date or when yourequest a BMW service appointment.

▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐ample, the remote control is not availableand the vehicle needs to be opened.

▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you reportthat your vehicle was stolen to the police, theBMW Assist Response Center can deter‐mine its position.

▷ In addition to these services, the optionalConvenience Plan offers a Concierge serv‐ice and information for route planning, traf‐fic, and weather. A limited number of callscan be made via the BMW Assist ResponseCenter with Critical Calling if, for example,the mobile phone is not available or dis‐charged.Press the SOS button to contact the BMWAssist Response Center.

▷ You can also access the BMW Assist Con‐cierge service via the Internet.

Seite 216


BMW

Ass

ist

TeleService*General informationTeleService supports communication with yourservice center.▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements

can be sent directly to the service center. Inthis way, the service center can plan its workin advance. This shortens the duration of theservice appointment.

▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐hicle's condition can be sent directly toRoadside Assistance.

▷ The service varies by country.▷ Connection costs may ensue.▷ Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements▷ BMW Assist is activated.▷ Wireless reception is available.▷ The engine is running.

Concierge service*General informationThe BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐mation on events, gas stations or hotels, andprovides phone numbers and addresses. Hotelscan be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐cierge service. The Concierge service is part ofthe optional Convenience Plan.

Starting the Concierge service1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service"A voice connection is established with the BMWAssist Concierge service. Phone numbers andaddresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.Open the message via the message list, refer topage 209.

Roadside AssistanceAt a glanceBMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted ifassistance is needed in the event of a break‐down.

Starting Roadside Assistance

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assistor TeleService1. "BMW Assist"2. "Roadside Assistance"

The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐nection is established to Roadside Assis‐tance.

Seite 217


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist orTeleService1. "BMW Assist"2. "Roadside Assistance"3. "Start service"

TeleService Diagnosis*TeleService Diagnosis enables the wirelesstransmission of detailed vehicle data that areimportant for vehicle diagnosis. These data aretransmitted automatically.After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐lished.

TeleService Help*TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosisof the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐less transmission.TeleService Help can be started after a promptby Roadside Assistance and the termination ofthe voice connection.

Starting TeleService Help1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.2. Set the parking brake.3. The engine is running.4. "TeleService Help"After completion of TeleService Help, a voiceconnection is established to Roadside Assis‐tance.

Activating BMW Assist*General informationIf the services included in a Assist subscriptionare not displayed, they may need to be activated.

Activating1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current position. Reception is usually bestwhen you have an unobstructed view of thesky.

2. Switch on the ignition.3. "Activate BMW Assist"Activation may take several minutes. If anothermenu is opened, activation continues running inthe background.

BMW Search*At a glanceA business search can be opened via BMWSearch.License conditionsThis product contains NetFront Browser soft‐ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.NetFront is a trademark or registered trademarkof ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐tries.This software is based in part on the work of theIndependent JPEG Group.

Requirements▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan.▷ The date setting, refer to page 80, on the

Control Display is current.▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐

work coverage.

Starting BMW Search1. "BMW Assist"

Seite 218


BMW

Ass

ist

2. "BMW Search"

3. If necessary, "OK".The BMW Search home page is displayed.

Using BMW SearchTo start a search:▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.▷ Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page1. Open "Options".2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page1. Open "Options".2. "Reload"

Cancel1. Open "Options".2. "Cancel loading"

Customer RelationsAt a glanceContact Customer Relations for information onall aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assistor TeleService1. "BMW Assist"2. "Customer Relations"The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐nection is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist orTeleService1. "BMW Assist"2. "Customer Relations"3. "Start service"

Service Request*At a glanceSends information to your service partner to re‐quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐ing a Service Request. If possible, your servicepartner will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request1. "BMW Assist"2. "Service Request"

Seite 219


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

3. "Start service"

Automatic Service Request*The TeleService data necessary for servicingthe vehicle are automatically sent to your servicepartner prior to the service deadline. If possible,the service partner will contact you and a serviceappointment can be arranged.To check when your service partner was noti‐fied:

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options".4. "Last Service Request"

Data transfer*The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Assist"2. Open "Options".3. "Data transfer"

Services status*Displaying available servicesDisplay of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist"2. "Service status"3. "Available services"

Activating BMW AssistIf the services included in a Assist subscriptionare not displayed, they may need to be activated."Activate BMW Assist"

Activating TeleServiceTeleService may need to be activated in the ve‐hicle."Activate TeleService"

Deactivating TeleServiceEven if the services of TeleService have beendeactivated, a voice connection to Roadside As‐sistance is still possible."Deactivate TeleService"

Seite 220


BMW

Ass

ist

Seite 221


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

MobilityTo ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this

chapter supplies you with important informationon the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and

tires, service, maintenance, and RoadsideAssistance.


RefuelingFuel capOpening1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket at‐tached to the fuel filler flap.

ClosingFit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearlyhear a click.

Do not pinch the retaining strap

Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to thecap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed prop‐erly and fuel vapors can escape.A message is displayed if the cap is loose ormissing.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapIn the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ample.1. Open the cover on the right side trim.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following whenrefuelingThe fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicksoff the first time.

Handling fuelsObey safety regulations posted at the gas

station.◀

Seite 224


Refu

elin

g

Fuel tank capacityFuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters

Refuel promptlyRefuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;

otherwise, engine functions are not ensured anddamage may occur.◀

Seite 225


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

FuelFuel quality

Refuel with unleaded fuel onlyDo not use leaded fuel as this would per‐

manently damage the catalytic converter.◀Do not refuel with ethanolDo not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as thiswould damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐tem.◀

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI89BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.

Gasoline with lower AKIThe minimum AKI Rating is 89.If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel gradeDo not use any gasoline below the mini‐

mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, enginedamage may occur.◀

Use high-quality brandsField experience has indicated significant differ‐ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale inthe United States and Canada.Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygenby weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanolplus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will notvoid the applicable warranties with respect todefects in materials or workmanship.

Minimum fuel grade

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drive‐ability, starting and stalling problems especiallyunder certain environmental conditions such ashigh ambient temperature and high altitude.Should you encounter driveability problemswhich you suspect could be related to the fuelyou are using, we recommend that you respondby switching to a recognized high-quality brandsuch as gasoline that is advertised as Top TierDetergent Gasoline.Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in unscheduled maintenance.◀

Seite 226


Fuel

Wheels and tiresTire inflation pressureSafety informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐sure influence the following:▷ The service life of the tires.▷ Road safety.▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the pressureOnly check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after driving no morethan 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least 2 hours. When the tiresare warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularlyRegularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed: at least twice a monthand before a long trip. If you fail to observe thisprecaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐correct tire pressures, a condition that may notonly compromise your vehicle's driving stability,but also lead to tire damage and the risk of anaccident.◀After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐itialize the Flat Tire Monitor.After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 227, contains all pressure specificationsfor the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.This information can be obtained from yourservice center.To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,please note the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.▷ Vehicle load.

▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 227, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on thetire inflation pressure label on the driver's doorpillar.

Maximum permissible speedDo not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

Tire size Pressure specifica‐tions in psi/kPa

Specifications in psi/kilopascal with coldtires

F.: 245/45 R 19 98 YR.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y

2.2 / 32-

-2.4 / 35

F.: 245/40 R 20 99 YXLR.:275/35 R 20 102 Y XL

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Seite 227


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance


F.:245/35 R 21 96 Y XLR.:275/30 R 21 98 Y XL

2.6 / 38-

-3.0 / 44

245/50 R 18 100 Y245/50 R 18 100 V M+S A/S245/50 R 18 100 H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 19 102 V M+S XL

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max. speedsabove 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/hIn order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐

cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speedsexceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevanttable on the following pages. Otherwise tiredamage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

With partial load



F.: 245/45 R 19 98 YR.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y

2.2 / 32-

-2.4 / 35

F.: 245/40 R 20 99 YXLR.:275/35 R 20 102 Y XL

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38


F.:245/35 R 21 96 Y XLR.:275/30 R 21 98 Y XL

2.6 / 38-

-3.0 / 44

245/50 R 18 100 Y245/50 R 18 100 V M+S A/S245/50 R 18 100 H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 19 102 V M+S XL

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

With full load



F.: 245/45 R 19 98 YR.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y

2.3 / 33-

-2.5 / 36

F.: 245/40 R 20 99 YXLR.:275/35 R 20 102 Y XL

2.5 / 36-

-2.8 / 41

F.:245/35 R 21 96 Y XLR.:275/30 R 21 98 Y XL

2.6 / 38-

-3.0 / 44

245/50 R 18 100 Y245/50 R 18 100 V M+S A/S245/50 R 18 100 H M+S

2.9 / 42 3.2 / 46

245/45 R 19 102 V M+S XL

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Seite 228


Whe

els a

nd ti

res

Tire identification marksTire size255/50 R 19 103 Y255: nominal width in mm50: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code19: rim diameter in inches103: load rating, not for ZR tiresY: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letterT = up to 118 mph/190 km/hH = up to 131 mph/210 km/hV = up to 150 mph/240 km/hW = up to 167 mph/270 km/hY = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3508xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design3508: tire ageTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of theU.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire ageDOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the35th week in 2008.Recommendation: regardless of wear, replacetires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;Temperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B C

Temperature A B CAll passenger car tires must conform to FederalSafety Requirements in addition to thesegrades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times aswell on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli‐mate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire's ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfa‐ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐planing, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Seite 229


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Temperature grade for this tireThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐sible tire failure.If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 232, are labeled witha circular symbol containing the letters RSCmarked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Tire treadSummer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.12 in/3 mm.There is an increased danger of hydroplaning ifthe tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.16 in/4 mm.Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires areless suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire'scircumference and have the legally requiredminimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damageInspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐fects:▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency

to pull to the left or right.In case of tire damageIf there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have thewheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,there is the increased risk of an accident.Drive carefully to the next service center or tireshop.If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

Repair of tire damageFor safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not havedamaged tires repaired; they should be re‐placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐sult.◀

Seite 230


Whe

els a

nd ti

res

Tire ageRecommendationregardless of wear, replace tires at least every6 years.

Manufacture dateOn the sidewall:DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the35th week in 2008.

Changing wheels and tiresMounting

Information on mounting tiresHave mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combinationInformation on the correct wheel-tire combina‐tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐tained from your service center.Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair thefunction of a variety of systems such as ABS orDSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐

mends that you use only wheels and tires thathave been approved for your particular vehiclemodel.For example, despite having the same officialsize ratings, variations can lead to body contactand with it, the risk of severe accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐ate non-approved wheels and tires to determineif they are suited for use, and therefore cannotensure the operating safety of the vehicle if theyare mounted.◀

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐hicle recommends certain tire brands. Thesecan be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.With proper use, these tires meet the higheststandards for safety and handling.

Retreaded tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tiresPossibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures canlimit service life and have a negative impact onroad safety.◀

Winter tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendswinter tires for winter roads or at temperaturesbelow +45 ℉/+7 ℃.Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐vide better winter traction than summer tires,they do not provide the same level of perform‐ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then display a corresponding sign in the field of

Seite 231


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐cialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tiresDo not exceed the maximum speed for the

winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐dents can occur.◀

Run-flat tiresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Nospare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Yourservice center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axlesThe manufacturer of your vehicle advisesagainst swapping wheels between the front andrear axles.This can impair the handling characteristics.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tiresLabel

RSC label on the tire sidewall.The wheels are composed of special rims andtires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐gree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐main drivable to a restricted degree in the eventof a pressure loss.

Continued driving with damaged tires, refer topage 96.

Changing run-flat tiresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Nospare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Yourservice center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chainsFine-link snow chainsOnly certain types of fine-link snow chains havebeen tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,classified as road-safe and recommended.Consult your service center for more informa‐tion.

UseUse only in pairs on the rear wheels, equippedwith the same tire size:▷ 245/50 R 18.▷ 245/45 R 19.Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according tothe chain manufacturer's instructions.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.When driving with snow chains, briefly activateDynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h whenusing snow chains.

Seite 232


Whe

els a

nd ti

res

Snow chain detection*

The conceptWhen using snow chains, you should setwhether you are driving with or without snowchains via the iDrive.The snow chain detection system supports youby automatically showing the detected state onthe Control Display.When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti‐vated automatically.At speeds above the maximum allowable speedwith snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rearaxle steering is activated again automatically.

Activating the status1. "Settings"2. "Tire chains"3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detectionIf functioning properly:▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not

activated .After you drive a short distance, the mes‐sage is shown on the Control Display and thestatus is activated automatically.Confirm the automatic activation.

▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The settingis activated .At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a warninglamp lights up and a message is displayed.Deactivate the status manually.

If not functioning properly:▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not

activated .A message does not appear on the ControlDisplay.The automatic detection system is malfunc‐tioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axlesteeringIf the status indicating that snow chains are inuse is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐vated automatically.At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axlesteering is activated again, even though snowchains are in use.

Seite 233


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Engine compartmentImportant features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number*2 Jump starting, negative terminal3 Washer fluid reservoir

4 Jump starting, positive terminal5 Oil filler neck6 Coolant reservoir

HoodOpening the hood

Working in the engine compartmentNever attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without thenecessary professional technical training.If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐lines, have any work on the vehicle performedonly by a service center.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

1. Pull the lever.

Seite 234


Engi

ne co

mpa

rtmen

t

2. Press the release handle and open the hood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is openThere is a danger of injury from protruding

parts when the hood is open.◀

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when drivingIf you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐diately and close it securely.◀

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 235


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Engine oilChecking the oil levelThe conceptThe oil level is monitored electronically and dis‐played on the Control Display.

Requirements▷ The engine must be running and warm after

the vehicle has been driven for at least6 miles/10 km.

▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on alevel roadway.

Displaying the oil level1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages▷ "Engine oil level OK"▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."

Duration with the engine running: ap‐prox. 3 minutes.Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.

▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1quart!"Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have thischecked."Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Too much engine oilHave the vehicle checked immedi‐

ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐gine damage.◀

▷ "Measurement inactive. Have thischecked."Note the newly calculated remaining mile‐age until the next oil service. Have the sys‐tem checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oilFiller neck

When the indicator lights up in the instrumentcluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil withinthe next 125 miles/200 km.

Recommended oil types, refer to page 236

Protect childrenKeep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and heed the warnings on the containersto prevent health risks.◀

Oil typesNote

No oil additivesOil additives may lead to engine dam‐

age.◀

Seite 236


Engi

ne o

il

Approved oil typesYour service center can advise you on which en‐gine oils have been approved by the manufac‐turer of your vehicle.The engine oil quality is critical for the life of theengine.Only use approved BMW High Performance oil.Approved oils belong to the following viscosityclasses: SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40and SAE 5W-30.

Alternative oil typesIf the approved engine oils are not available, upto 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow‐ing specification may be used.API SM specifications or higher

CoolantGeneral information

Danger of burns from hot engineDo not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant maycause burns.◀

Suitable additivesOnly use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐

gine damage may occur. The additives areharmful to your health.◀Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives are suit‐able for your vehicle. Ask your service center forsuitable additives.

Coolant levelHave your service center check the coolant leveland add coolant, if necessary.

DisposalComply with the relevant environmentalprotection regulations when disposingof coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 237


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

MaintenanceBMW Maintenance System

The system obtains informationabout the road safety and opera‐tional reliability of the vehicle andtakes into account aspects suchas a timely vehicle check. The aimis to optimize maintenance pro‐

cedures with a view to reducing the cost of run‐ning the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the driving conditions of your vehicle.Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐mines the maintenance requirements.The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance you need to your userprofile.Details on the service requirements, refer topage 82, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance is con‐tinuously stored in the remote control. Yourservice center will read out this data and suggestthe right array of service procedures for your ve‐hicle.Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐mote control that you used most recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehicle bat‐tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐count.If this occurs, have a service center update thetime-dependent maintenance procedures,such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐vated-charcoal filter.

Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet for USmodels and Warranty andService Guide Booklet forCanadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐mation Booklet for US models and Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models foradditional information on service requirements.Maintenance and repair should be performed byyour service center. Make sure to have regularmaintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐cle's Service and Warranty Information Bookletfor US models, and in the Warranty and ServiceGuide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐tries are proof of regular maintenance.

Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnostics

On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐sions.

Emissions values▷ The warning lamp lights up:

The emissions values are deterio‐rating. Have the vehicle checked assoon as possible.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under cer‐tain circumstances:

Seite 238


Mai

nten

ance

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.Reduce the vehicle speed and havethe system checked immediately;otherwise, serious engine misfiringwithin a brief period can seriouslydamage emission control compo‐nents, in particular the catalytic con‐verter.

Fuel filler capThe indicator lamp lights up.If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,the OBD system may conclude that fuel

vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,the display should go out in a short time.

Data memoryYour vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐eration, faults and user settings. These data arestored in the remote control and can be read outwith suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this wayprovide valuable information for service proc‐esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if yousigned a service contract for Assist, certain ve‐hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicleto facilitate the desired services.

Seite 239


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Replacing componentsTool kit

The tool kit is located in the rear compartmentin the trunk, refer to page 143.

Wiper blade replacementReplacing the wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to

page 72, the wiper arms.2. Fold up the wipers.

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐sition.

4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

Do not fold down the wipers without wiperblades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades havenot been installed; this may damage the wind‐shield.◀

Lamp and bulb replacementGeneral informationLamps and bulbs make an essential contributionto vehicle safety.The manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures toyour service center if you are unfamiliar withthem or they are not described here.You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbsat your service center.

Danger of burnsOnly change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of gettingburned.◀

Working on the lighting systemWhen working on the lighting system, you

should always switch off the lights affected toprevent short circuits.To avoid possible injury or equipment damagewhen replacing bulbs, observe any instructionsprovided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not touch the bulbsDo not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts ofcontamination will burn into the bulb's surfaceand reduce its service life.Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, orhold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Light-emitting diodes installed behind a coverserve as the light source for controls, display el‐ements and other equipment.

Seite 240


Repl

acin

g co

mpo

nent

s

These light-emitting diodes, which are relatedto conventional lasers, are officially designatedas Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the coversDo not remove the covers, and never stare

into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlamp glassCondensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When thelight is switched on, the condensation evapo‐rates after a short time. The headlamp glassesdo not need to be changed.If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., waterdroplets form in the lamp, have it checked byyour service center.

Front lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Adaptive light control2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights*3 Low beams/high beams4 Turn signal

Xenon headlamps*Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lampson and off frequently shortens their life.If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lampsand continue the trip with great care. Complywith local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement onxenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐cluding bulb replacement, performed only by aservice center.Due to the high voltage present in the system,there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐ried out improperly.◀For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,please contact your BMW center.

Turn signals, incl. side indicatorsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 240.These lamps are made using LED technology.Please contact your service center in the eventof a malfunction.

Adaptive light controlFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 240.The illustration shows the left side of the enginecompartment.55-watt bulb, H3

1. Open the folding cover in the engine com‐partment.

2. Turn the cap and remove it.

Seite 241


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb and replace it.5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

the reverse order.

Parking lampsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 240.These lamps are made using LED technology.Please contact your service center in the eventof a malfunction.

Front fog lampsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 240.35-watt bulb, H8

1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front.

2. Remove the screws.

3. Pull the lamp out toward the front.4. Remove the bulb and replace it.5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

the reverse order.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal2 Backup lamp3 Rear fog lamp*4 Tail lamp5 Brake lamp

Turn signal, brake, tail, and licenseplate lampsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 240.These lights are made using LED technology.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

Seite 242


Repl

acin

g co

mpo

nent

s

Rear fog lamp and backup lamps in thetailgateBackup lamps in the tailgate

Accessing the lamps1. Remove the four screws using the screw

driver from the tool kit.

2. Pull down the cover with a firm tug.

3. Pull off the connector toward the left.

4. Replace the bulb.

Rear fog lampsTo change the rear fog lamp, contact your serv‐ice center.

Backup lamp16-watt bulb, W16W

Turn the bulb, pull it out, and replace it.

Changing wheelsNotesYour vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, referto page 232, as standard equipment.They do not need to be replaced immediately inthe event of a puncture.When mounting new tires or changing fromsummer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flattires for your own safety.No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.The tools for changing wheels are available asaccessories from your service center.

Seite 243


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated in the positions shown.

Lug bolt lock*

The lug bolt lock is found in the tool kit.

▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

Removing1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.2. Unscrew the lug bolt.Remove the adapter after screwing the lug boltback on.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐trolyte will last for the life of the battery.Your service center will be glad to advise you onquestions regarding the battery.

Battery replacementUse approved vehicle batteries only.Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged andsystems or functions may not be fully availa‐ble.◀After a battery replacement, have the batteryregistered on the vehicle by your service centerto ensure that all comfort functions are fullyavailable.

Charging the batteryIn the vehicle, only charge the battery via theterminals, refer to page 247, in the engine com‐partment with the engine off.

Power failureAfter a temporary power loss, some equipmentneeds to be reinitialized.Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again, refer to page 57.▷ Time: update, refer to page 80.▷ Date: update, refer to page 80.▷ Radio station: Save again, refer to

page 174.▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of

the navigation.

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by yourservice center or take them to a recy‐cling center.

Seite 244


Repl

acin

g co

mpo

nent

s

Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesNotes

Replacing fusesNever attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substituteof another color or amperage rating; this couldlead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting ina fire in the vehicle.◀Plastic tweezers and information on the fusetypes and locations are stored in the fuse box inthe trunk.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,arrow 2.

In the trunk

Open the cover on the right side trim.

Information on the fuse types and locations isfound on a separate sheet.

Seite 245


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Breakdown assistanceHazard warning flashers

The button for the hazard warning flashers is lo‐cated in the center console.

Emergency Request*Requirements▷ Equipment version with full preparation

package mobile phone.An Emergency Request can be made, evenif no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐hicle.

▷ BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 218.▷ The radio ready state is switched on.▷ The BMW Assist system is functional and

logged into a wireless communications net‐work.

▷ The emergency call system is functional.Only use Emergency Request in an emergency.

Emergency Request not guaranteedFor technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐

quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorableconditions.◀

Service contract▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐

pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐tivated by the service center without youhaving to visit a workshop.

After deactivation, an Emergency Requestis no longer possible.

▷ The system can be reactivated by a servicecenter after you sign a new contract.

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up.▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated.If the situation allows, wait in your vehicleuntil the voice connection has been estab‐lished.

▷ The LED flashes if the connection to theBMW Assist Response Center has been es‐tablished.After the Emergency Request arrives at theBMW Assist Response Center, the BMWAssist Response Center contacts you andtakes further steps to help you.Even if you are unable to respond, the BMWAssist Response Center can take furthersteps to help you under certain circumstan‐ces.For this purpose, data that are used to de‐termine the necessary rescue measures,such as the current position of the vehicle ifit can be established, are transmitted to theBMW Assist Response Center.

▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW AssistResponse Center cannot be heard on thehands-free system, the hands-free system

Seite 246


Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

may be malfunctioning. However, the BMWAssist Response Center may still be able tohear you.

Initiating an Emergency RequestautomaticallyUnder certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐quest is automatically initiated immediately aftera severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐tion is not affected by pressing the button.

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located on the left in thetrunk.Release the Velcro® fastener to remove it.

First aid kit*

The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐ment on the right side in the trunk.Fold up the cover to remove it.Some of the articles have a limited service life.Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐ularly and replace any items promptly.

Roadside AssistanceService availabilityRoadside Assistance from the BMW Group pro‐vides around-the-clock assistance in the eventof a breakdown, including on weekends and hol‐idays.Phone numbers of the Response Center ofRoadside Assistance in your home country: re‐fer to the Contact brochure.

Jump startingNotesIf the battery is discharged, an engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicle andtwo jumper cables. Only use jumper cables withfully insulated clamp handles.To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.

Do not touch live partsTo avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐nents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐mately the same capacity in Ah. This infor‐mation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehiclesMake sure that there is no contact be‐

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀

Starting aid terminalsConnecting order

Seite 247


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Connect the jumper cables in the correct order;otherwise, there is the danger of injury fromsparking.◀

The so-called starting aid terminal in the enginecompartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐minal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as thenegative terminal.

Connecting the cables1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐

minal.2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding starting aidterminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicleto be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding engine orbody ground of the vehicle providing assis‐tance.

5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐

sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐hicle to be started.

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle andlet it run for several minutes at an increasedidle speed.

2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as usual.If the first starting attempt is not successful,wait a few minutes before making anotherattempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐tery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order.Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towingTow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at thefront or rear of the BMW. It is located in the toolkit under the trunk floor.

Tow fitting, information on use▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads

only.▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐hicle can occur.◀

Seite 248


Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Screw thread

Push out the cover by pressing on the arrowsymbol.

Towing

General informationLight towing vehicleThe towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it willnot be possible to control the vehicle re‐sponse.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctlyAttach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts maycause damage.◀

Do not tow when the electronics systemhas failed.

Do not tow the vehicle when the electronics sys‐tem has failed; otherwise, the electric steeringlock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannotbe steered.◀

Observe before towingVehicle without manual parking lock*:

Transport the vehicle on a loading plat‐form only.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a manualparking lock*, it may not be towed.Have the vehicle transported on a loading plat‐form only or the vehicle can be damaged.◀Vehicle with manual parking lock*:

Manually release the transmission lock

Manually release the transmission lock, even ifthere is no malfunction involving the transmis‐sion. Otherwise, there is the danger that thetransmission lock will be engaged automaticallyduring towing.◀

Towing*Observe the notes on towingObserve all notes on towing or vehicle

damage or accidents can occur.◀▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;

otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turnsignals, and windshield wipers may be un‐available.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axleraised, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking and steer‐ing.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐quired.

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐dow.

Adhere to the towing speed and distanceDo not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/

50 km/h and a towing distance of 30 miles/50 kmor damage to the transmission can occur.◀

Towing methodsDo not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage mayresult.◀

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:

Seite 249


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐nering.

▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if itis secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make sure thatthe tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresses onthe vehicle components when towing, alwaysuse nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctlyOnly secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀

Tow truckVehicle without manual parking lock*:

Have vehicles transported on a loadingplatform only.

Do not tow the vehicle with the front or rear axlelifted individually or the vehicle can be dam‐aged.◀

Do not lift the vehicle.Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or


Secure the vehicle against rolling off.Apply the parking brake after towing and

secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐sary.Have the operability of transmission position Pchecked by the service center.◀Vehicle with manual parking lock*:

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truckwith a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle.Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or


Secure the vehicle against rolling off.Apply the parking brake after towing and

secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐sary.Have the operability of transmission position Pchecked by the service center.◀

Tow-starting

NoteDue to the automatic transmission, the enginecannot be started by tow-starting.Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐edied.

Seite 250


Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

CareCar washesNotes

Steam jets or high-pressure washersWhen using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance awayand use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃.Holding them too close or using excessivelyhigh pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐age or preliminary damage that may then lead tolong-term damage.Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.◀

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do notspray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,Park Distance Control*, for extended periods oftime and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ter.Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐hicle.

Washing in automatic car washesYour vehicle can be washed in automatic carwashes right from the start.Give preference to cloth car washes or thosethat use soft brushes in order to avoid paintdamage.

NotesNote the following:▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not

damaged by the transport mechanisms.▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

may be damaged, depending on the width ofthe vehicle.

▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer topage 71, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐vation.

Guide rails in car washesAvoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle bodycould be damaged.◀

Before driving into a car washThe vehicle is able to roll when the followingsteps are taken:

1. Press on the brake pedal.2. Engage transmission position N.3. Release the parking brake, refer to

page 67, or deactivate Automatic Hold, referto page 69.

4. Switch the engine off.

Transmission position P with the igni‐tion off

When the ignition is switched off, position Pis engaged automatically. When in an auto‐matic car wash, for example, ensure that theignition is not switched off accidentally.◀

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outsidewhen in transmission position N.A signal is sounded when an attempt is made tolock the vehicle.

Transmission positionTransmission position P is engaged automati‐cally:▷ When the ignition is switched off.▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlamps▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers.▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to

insects, with shampoo and wash off withwater.

Seite 251


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action canbe reduced and corrosion of the brake discs canoccur.

Vehicle careCar care productsBMW recommends using cleaning and careproducts from BMW, since these have beentested and approved.

Car care and cleaning productsFollow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors orwindows.Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐cles.Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐gerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to driving safety andvalue retention.Environmental influences can act on the vehiclepaint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your carcare to these influences.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather often, using acloth or vacuum cleaner.Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to increasedwear and premature degradation of the leathersurface.To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, provide leather care roughly every twomonths.Clean light-colored leather more frequently asdust and dirt are more noticeable.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt andgrease will gradually break down the protectivelayer of the leather surface.Suitable care products are available from theservice center.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use asoft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitableinterior cleaner.Clean the upholstery down to the seams usinglarge sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐terial vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fastenersOpen Velcro® fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsUse wheel cleaner, particularly during the wintermonths. Do not use aggressive, acidic, stronglyalkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jetsabove 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer'sinstructions.

Chrome surfaces*Carefully clean components such as the radiatorgrille or door handles with an ample supply ofwater, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐larly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber componentsAside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐ers.When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐icon-containing car care products in order toavoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts*Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a softcloth.

Seite 252


Care

Plastic componentsThese include:▷ Headliner.▷ Lamp lenses.▷ Instrument cluster cover.▷ Matte black spray-coated components.Clean with a microfiber cloth.Moisten the cloth lightly and use plasticcleanser, if necessary.Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcoholor solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead tosurface damage.◀

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaningDo not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safetybelts clipped into their buckles.Do not allow the reels to retract the safety beltsuntil they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats*Floor mats can be removed from the passengercompartment for cleaning.If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber clothand water or an interior cleaner. To prevent mat‐ting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the di‐rection of travel only.

Sensors/camerasTo clean the sensors or cameras of equipmentsuch as the High-beam Assistant*, ActiveCruise Control* or Night Vision*, use a clothmoistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screensUse a microfiber cloth to clean the Control Dis‐play or the Head-up Display*.

Cleaning displaysDo not use chemical or household cleans‐

ers.Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ces or electrical components.Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and donot use abrasive materials; otherwise, damagecan result.◀

Long-term vehicle storageYour service center can advise you on what toconsider when storing the vehicle for longerthan three months.

Seite 253


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

ReferenceThis chapter contains technical data, short

commands for the voice activation system, and anindex that will quickly take you to the information

you need.


Technical dataDimensionsWidth with mirrors, height with roof-mounted aerial

Width without mirrors

Seite 256


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Length, wheel base

Smallest turning circleØ: 40 ft/12.2 m Engine specifications

The rated power outputs are established on thebasis of fuel grade AKI 91.

535i

Displacement cu in/cm³ 181.8/2,979

No. of cylinders 6

Maximum outputat engine speed

hprpm

3005,800-6,250

Maximum torqueat engine speed

lb ft/Nmrpm

300/4071,200-5,000

550i

Displacement cu in/cm³ 268.2/4,395

No. of cylinders 8

Seite 257


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

550i

Maximum outputat engine speed

hprpm

4005,500-6,400

Maximum torqueat engine speed

lb ft/Nmrpm

450/6101,750-4,500

Weights535i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,667/2,570

Load lbs/kg 1,014/460

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,580/1,170

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Trunk capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700

550i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,954/2,700

Load lbs/kg 1,014/460

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,811/1,275

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,308/1,500

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Trunk capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700

CapacitiesNotes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, referto page 226

Windshield and headlampwasher system

US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0

Seite 258


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Short commands for voice activationsystemGeneral informationInstructions for voice activation system, refer topage 25.

To have the available spoken instructions readout loud: ›Voice commands‹

Useful short commandsFunction Command

Owner's Manual ›Owner's Manual‹

Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹

Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹

Opening the settings ›Settings‹

Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹

Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹

Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹

Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹

Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹

Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹

CD/multimedia*CD/DVD drive

Function Command

Playing back a CD ›C D on‹

Selecting a CD ›Select C D‹

Selecting a CD and track ›C D ... track ... ‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5

Selecting a track ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., track 5

Opening the CD and multimedia menu ›C D and multimedia‹

Seite 259


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Function Command

CD and DVD ›C D‹

Displaying entertainment details on the split screen ›Entertainment details‹

Music collection

Function Command

Calling up the current playback ›Current playback‹

Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹

Playing the music collection ›Music collection on‹

Searching for music; opening the menu ›Music search‹

Playing back the most frequently played tracks ›Top fifty‹

External devices

Function Command

Opening external devices ›External devices‹

Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹

AUX front ›AUX front‹

Tone

Function Command

Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹

RadioFM

Function Command

Calling up the radio ›Radio‹

Calling up an FM station ›F M‹

Opening manual search ›Manual‹

Seite 260


Shor

t com

man

ds fo

r voi

ce ac

tivat

ion

syst

em

Function Command

Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Selecting the frequency range ›Select frequency‹

AM

Function Command

Calling up an AM station ›A M‹

Opening manual search ›Manual‹

Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐quency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Weather Band

Function Command

Calling up the Weather Band ›Weather band‹

Switching on the Weather Band ›Weather band on‹

Selecting a Weather Band station ›Select a weather channel‹

Satellite radio

Function Command

Calling up the satellite radio ›Satellite radio‹

Switching on the satellite radio ›Satellite radio on‹

Selecting a satellite radio channel ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satelliteradio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Opening the stored stations ›Presets‹

Choosing a stored station ›Select preset‹

Selecting a stored station ›Preset ... ‹ e.g., stored station 2

Seite 261


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Telephone*Function Command

Opening the Telephone menu ›Telephone‹

Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹

Redialing ›Redial‹

Displaying accepted calls ›Received calls‹

Dialing a phone number ›Dial number‹

List of messages ›Messages‹

Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹

Navigation*General information

Function Command

Navigation menu ›Navigation‹

Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹

Entering the address ›Enter address‹

Opening destination guidance ›Guidance‹

Starting destination guidance ›Start guidance‹

Terminating destination guidance ›Stop guidance‹

Opening the home address ›Home address‹

Opening the route criteria ›Route preference‹

Opening the route ›Route information‹

Switching on the spoken instructions ›Switch on voice instructions‹

Repeating a spoken instruction ›Repeat voice instructions‹

Switching off the spoken instructions ›Switch off voice instructions‹

Displaying the address book ›Address book‹

Displaying the last destinations ›Last destinations‹

Opening the traffic bulletins ›Traffic Info‹

Special destinations ›Points of interest‹

Seite 262


Shor

t com

man

ds fo

r voi

ce ac

tivat

ion

syst

em

Map

Function Command

Displaying the map ›Map‹

Map facing north ›Map facing north‹

Map in the direction of travel ›Map in direction of travel‹

Perspective map ›Map perspective view‹

Automatic scaling of the map ›Map with automatic scaling‹

Scale...feet ›Map scale ... feet‹

Scale...miles ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale5 miles

Split screen settings

Function Command

Split screen ›Switch on splitscreen‹

Switching off the split screen ›Turn off split screen‹

Adapting the split screen ›Split screen content‹

Split screen, map facing north ›Split screen map facing north‹

Split screen, current position ›Split screen current position‹

Split screen, direction of travel ›Split screen map in direction oftravel‹

Split screen, perspective ›Split screen perspective‹

Split screen, wider intersection zoom ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹

Split screen scale...feet ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., splitscreen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...miles ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., splitscreen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹

Split screen, computer ›Split screen on board info‹

Split screen, trip computer ›Splitscreen trip computer‹

Automatically scaling the split screen ›Split screen automatic scaling‹

Seite 263


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

New destination entry ›Enter address‹

Trip list ›Stored trips‹

Contacts*Function Command

My contacts ›My contacts‹

Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹

New contact ›New contact‹

BMW Assist*Function Command

Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹

Opening BMW Search ›B M W Search‹

Vehicle informationOwner's Manual

Function Command

Opening the Owner's Manual ›Display Owner's Manual‹

Opening the Quick Reference ›Quick reference‹

Opening the keyword search ›Owner's Manual‹

Opening Search by pictures ›Search by pictures‹

Computer

Function Command

Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹

Opening the trip computer ›Trip computer‹

Seite 264


Shor

t com

man

ds fo

r voi

ce ac

tivat

ion

syst

em

Vehicle

Function Command

Opening the vehicle information ›Vehicle info‹

Opening the vehicle status ›Vehicle status‹

AdjustingVehicle

Function Command

Opening the main menu ›Main menu‹

Opening the settings ›Settings‹

Opening the options ›Options‹

Info display of the instrument cluster ›Info Display‹

Central display settings ›Control display‹

Opening the time and date settings ›Time and date‹

Opening the language and unit settings ›Language and units‹

Opening the speed limit settings ›Speed‹

Opening the light settings ›Lighting‹

Opening the door lock settings ›Door locks‹

Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹

Equipment*

Function Command

Opening the air conditioning settings ›Climate‹

Opening the Head-up Display settings ›head up display‹

Enabling the rear seat ›Allow rear control‹

Seite 265


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 101 ACC Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 107 Accessories and parts 7 Activated-charcoal filter 130 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

tion 98 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 107 Active seat, front 50 Active seat ventilation,

front 51 Active seat ventilation,

rear 53 Active Steering, integral 102 Adaptive brake assistant 101 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 100 Adaptive light control 87 Adaptive light control, bulb re‐

placement 241 Additives, oil 236 Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 48 After washing vehicle 252 Airbags 90 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated-air mode 129 Air distribution, manual 128 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 130 Air pressure, tires 227 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐

tion 131 Air volume, automatic climate

control 129 Alarm system 42 Alarm, unintentional 43 All around the center con‐

sole 17

All around the headliner 18 All around the steering

wheel 12 ALL program, automatic cli‐

mate control 130 All-season tires, refer to Win‐

ter tires 231 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 135 Alternative oil types 236 AM/FM station 174 Announcement, navigation,

refer to Spoken instruc‐tions 163

Antifreeze, washer fluid 72 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 101 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 101 Approved engine oils 236 Armrest, refer to Center arm‐

rest 141 Ashtray 136 Assist 216 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐

tance 247 Assistance when driving

off 106 Audio playback 181 AUTO intensity 129 Automatic car wash 251 Automatic climate con‐

trol 128 Automatic Cruise Control with

Stop & Go 107 Automatic Curb Monitor 59 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 91 Automatic headlamp con‐

trol 87 Automatic Hold 68 Automatic locking 38

Automatic recirculated-aircontrol 129

Automatic Soft Closing,doors 38

Automatic Soft Closing, tail‐gate 39

Automatic transmission withSteptronic 72

Automatic trunk lid 39 AUTO program, automatic cli‐

mate control 129 AUTO program, intensity 129 AUX-IN port 192 Axle loads, weights 258

BBackrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 50 Backrest, seats 48 Backrest width 50 Back seats, adjusting 51 Backup camera 120 Backup lamps, bulb replace‐

ment 243 Balance 172 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 247 Bar for tow-starting/tow‐

ing 249 Basic position, rear seats 53 Bass 172 Battery replacement, remote

control, rear entertain‐ment 197

Battery replacement, vehiclebattery 244

Battery replacement, vehicleremote control 32

Battery, vehicle 244 Before entering the car

wash 251 Belts, safety belts 53

Seite 266


Ever

ythi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Beverage holder, cu‐pholder 142

Blinds, sun protection 45 Bluetooth connection, activat‐

ing/deactivating 205 BMW Assist 216 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer

to Saving fuel 150 BMW homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys‐

tem 238 BMW Search 218 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 142 Brake assistant 101 Brake assistant, adaptive 101 Brake discs, breaking in 146 Brake force display 100 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐

play 100 Brake lamps, bulb replace‐

ment 242 Brake lights, adaptive 100 Brake pads, breaking in 146 Braking, notes 147 Breakdown assis‐

tance 246, 247 Breaking in 146 Brightness of Control Dis‐

play 81 Bulb replacement 240 Bulb replacement, front 241 Bulb replacement, rear 242 Bulbs and lamps 240 Button, Start/Stop 65 Bypassing, see starting

aid 247

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera, backup camera 122 Camera, care 253 Camera, Side View 123 Camera, Top View 120

Can holder, refer to Cu‐pholder 142

Car battery 244 Car care products 252 Care, vehicle 252 Cargo 148 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 149 Car key, refer to Remote con‐

trol 32 Carpet, care 253 Car wash 251 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 146 Category details, special des‐

tinations 157 CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 238 CD/DVD 181 CD/DVD player, rear 196 CDs, storing 187 Cell phone 204 Center armrest 141 Center console 17 Central locking system 35 Central screen, refer to Control

Display 19 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 6 Changing parts 240 Changing wheels/tires 231 Check Control 83 Children, seating position 61 Children, transporting

safely 61 Child restraint fixing sys‐

tem 61 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 62 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 61 Child-safety locks 64 Child seat, mounting 61 Child seats 61 Chrome parts, care 252 Cigarette lighter 136 Climate control 128

Climate control wind‐shield 147

Clock 76 Closing/opening from in‐

side 38 Closing/opening via door

lock 37 Closing/opening with remote

control 35 Clothes hooks 142 Collision warning, iBrake 112 Combination instrument 14 Combination instrument, elec‐

tronic displays 16 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 70 Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 70 Comfort Access 41 COMFORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control 105 Computer 78 Concierge service 217 Condensation on win‐

dows 129 Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 148 Condition Based Service

CBS 238 Confirmation signal 37 Contacts 213 Control Display 19 Control Display, care 253 Control Display, settings 80 Controller 19 Control systems, driving sta‐

bility 101 Convenient opening 36 Convenient operation 37 Coolant 237 Coolant temperature 76 Cooling function 130 Cooling, maximum 129 Cooling system 237 Corrosion on brake discs 148 Cruise control 114 Cruise control, active with

stop-and-go 107

Seite 267


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Cruising range 77 Cupholder 142 Curb weight 258 Current fuel consumption 76 Current location, storing 156 Customer Relations 219

DDamage, tires 230 Damping Control, dy‐

namic 102 Data, technical 256 Date 76 Daytime running lights 87 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 129 Destination guidance 161 Destination guidance with in‐

termediate destinations 160 Destination input, naviga‐

tion 154 Detour, selecting 167 Digital clock 76 Digital radio 175 Dimensions 256 Dimmable mirrors 59 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 70 Displacement, engine 257 Display, instrument clus‐

ter 75 Display in windshield 126 Display lighting, refer to Instru‐

ment lighting 89 Displays 14 Displays, care 253 Disposal, coolant 237 Disposal, vehicle battery 244 Distance control, refer to

PDC 115 Distance, selecting for

ACC 108 Divided screen view, split

screen 23 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 32

Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐ing 38

Drive-off assistant 106 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 101 Driving instructions, breaking

in 146 Driving notes, general 146 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 101 Driving tips 146 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 101 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 101 DVD/CD 181 DVD/CD notes 186 DVD/CD player, rear 196 DVD changer 185 DVD settings 184 DVDs, storing 187 DVD, video 183 Dynamic Damping Con‐

trol 102 Dynamic destination guid‐

ance 162 Dynamic Drive 102 Dynamic Driving Control 103 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 101 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 101

EEfficientDynamics, refer to

Saving fuel 150 Electronic displays, instru‐

ment cluster 16 Electronic engine oil level

check 236 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 101 Emergency detection, remote

control 33 Emergency release, door

lock 38

Emergency release, fuel fillerflap 224

Emergency release, parkingbrake 67

Emergency Request 246 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 247 Emergency start function, en‐

gine start 33 Emergency unlocking, tail‐

gate 41 Energy Control 76 Energy regeneration 77 Engine compartment 234 Engine compartment, working

in 234 Engine coolant 237 Engine oil 236 Engine oil, adding 236 Engine oil additives 236 Engine oil filler neck 236 Engine oil temperature 76 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 236 Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 236 Engine specifications 257 Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 33 Engine start, Help 247 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 65 Engine stop 66 Engine temperature 76 Equalizer 172 Equipment, interior 134 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to DSC 101 Exchanging wheels/tires 231 Exhaust system 146 Exterior mirrors 58 External devices 192 External start 247 External temperature dis‐

play 75 External temperature warn‐

ing 75 Eyes for securing cargo 149

Seite 268


Ever

ythi

ng fr

om A

to Z

FFader 172 Failure message, refer to

Check Control 83 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐

tional alarm 43 Fan, refer to Air volume 129 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 83 Filler neck for engine oil 236 Fine wood, care 252 First aid kit 247 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow

fitting 248 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 92 Flat tire, warning lamp 93, 96 Flat tire, wheel change 243 Flooding 147 Floor carpet, care 253 Floor mats, care 253 FM/AM station 174 Fold-out position, windshield

wipers 72 Foot brake 147 Front airbags 90 Front fog lamps 89 Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐

placement 242 Front lamps 241 Front passenger airbags, au‐

tomatic deactivation 91 Front passenger airbags, indi‐

cator lamp 92 Front seats, adjusting 48 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 95 Fuel cap 224 Fuel consumption, current 76 Fuel filler flap 224 Fuel gauge 77 Fuel quality 226 Fuel, tank capacity 258 Fuse 245

GGarage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remotecontrol 134

Gas station recommenda‐tion 163

Gear change, automatic trans‐mission 73

General driving notes 146 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐

amic glass sunroof 45 Glove compartment 140 GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐

gation system 154 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐

proved 258 Gross weight, permissible for

trailer towing 258

HHand brake, refer to Parking

brake 66 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 135 Hazard warning flashers 246 HD Radio 175 Head airbags 90 Headlamp control, auto‐

matic 87 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐

ture 86 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐

ture via remote control 36 Headlamp flasher 70 Headlamp glass 241 Headlamps 241 Headlamps, care 251 Headlamp washer system 70 Headliner 18 Headphones, rear entertain‐

ment 199 Head restraints 48 Head restraints, front 55 Head restraints, rear 56 Head-up Display 126 Head-up Display, care 253

Heavy cargo, stowing 149 Height, seats 48 Height with roof-mounted aer‐

ial, vehicle 256 High-beam assistant 88 High beams 70 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam assistant 88 Hills 147 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 106 Holder for beverages 142 Homepage 6 Hood 234 Horn 12 Hotel function, tailgate 41 Hot exhaust system 146 House number, entering for

navigation 155 HUD, Head-up Display 126 Hydroplaning 147

IiBrake, collision warning 112 Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 75 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 75 Identification marks, tires 229 Identification number, refer to

Engine compartment 234 iDrive 19 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 32 Ignition off 65 Ignition on 65 Indication of a flat tire 93, 96 Indicator and warning mes‐

sages 14 Indicator lamps 14 Individual air distribution 128 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure monitor,

tires 92 Inflation pressure, tires 227

Seite 269


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Inflation pressure warning,tires 95

Info display 75 Information on navigation

data 167 Initialization, Integral Active

Steering 102 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 95 Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐

itor TPM 93 Instrument cluster 14, 75 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 16 Instrument lighting 89 Integral Active Steering 102 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote

control 134 Intensity, AUTO program 129 Interactive map 159 Interior equipment 134 Interior lamps 89 Interior lamps via remote con‐

trol 36 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview and exterior

mirrors, automatic dimmingfeature 59

Interior rearview mirror 59 Intermediate destina‐

tions 160 Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi‐

gation 155 Interval display, service re‐

quirements 82 iPod/iPhone 193

JJacking points for the vehicle

jack 244 Jack, refer to Vehicle

jack 244 Joystick, automatic transmis‐

sion 73

KKey/remote control 32 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 41 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 33 Kickdown, automatic trans‐

mission 73 Knee airbag 90

LLamp replacement 240 Lamp replacement, front 241 Lamp replacement, rear 242 Lamps 86 Lamps and bulbs 240 Lane departure warning 97 Lane margin, warning 97 Language on Control Dis‐

play 81 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 149 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 62 Leather, care 252 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 240 Length, vehicle 257 Letters and numbers, enter‐

ing 24 License plate lamp, bulb re‐

placement 242 Light-alloy wheels, care 252 Light control 87 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 240 Lighter, front 136 Lighting 86 Lighting via remote con‐

trol 36 Light switch 86 Load 149 Loading 148 Loading position 139 Lock, door 37

Locking/unlocking from in‐side 38

Locking/unlocking via doorlock 37

Locking/unlocking with re‐mote control 35

Locking, automatic 38 Locking, central 35 Locking via tailgate 39 Lock, power window 45 Locks, doors, and win‐

dows 64 Low beams 86 Low beams, automatic, refer to

High-beam assistant 88 Lower back support 50 Lug bolt lock 244 Luggage compartment lid 38 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 149 Lumbar support 50

MMaintenance 238 Maintenance require‐

ments 238 Maintenance, service require‐

ments 82 Maintenance system,

BMW 238 Malfunction displays, refer to

Check Control 83 Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐

pension 103 Manual air distribution 128 Manual air volume 129 Manual brake, refer to Parking

brake 66 Manual mode, transmis‐

sion 73 Manual operation, backup

camera 120 Manual operation, door

lock 38 Manual operation, exterior mir‐

rors 58

Seite 270


Ever

ythi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Manual operation, fuel fillerflap 224

Manual operation, Park Dis‐tance Control PDC 116

Manual operation, parkingbrake 67

Manual operation, SideView 122

Manual operation, TopView 119

Map, destination entry 158 Map in split screen 164 Map view 164 Marking on approved

tires 231 Marking, run-flat tires 232 Massage seat, front 50 Master key, refer to Remote

control 32 Maximum cooling 129 Maximum speed, display 84 Maximum speed, winter

tires 231 Measure, units of 81 Medical kit 247 Memory for seat, mirrors,

steering wheel 57 Menu in instrument clus‐

ter 77 Menus, operating, iDrive 19 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐

ing concept 20 Message list, traffic bulle‐

tins 165 Microfilter 130 Minimum tread, tires 230 Mirror 58 Mirror memory 57 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 147 Mobile phone 204 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 6 Moisture in headlamp 241 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐

play 19 Mounting of child restraint fix‐

ing systems 61

MP3 player 192 Multi-function hook 143 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 12 Multimedia 181 Music collection 187 Music search 189 Music, storing 187

NNavigation 154 Navigation data 167 Neck restraints, front, refer to

Head restraints 55 Neck restraints, rear, refer to

Head restraints 56 New wheels and tires 231 Night Vision with pedestrian

detection 123 NORMAL program, Dynamic

Driving Control 105 Notes 6 Number of cylinders, en‐

gine 257 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 250

OOBD Onboard Diagnos‐

tics 238 Obstacle marking, backup

camera 121 Odometer 75 Oil 236 Oil, adding 236 Oil additives 236 Oil change interval, service re‐

quirements 82 Oil filler neck 236 Oil level check 236 Oil types, alternative 236 Oil types, approved 236 Old batteries, disposal 244 Onboard computer, refer to

Computer 78

Onboard DiagnosticsOBD 238

Onboard monitor, refer toControl Display 19

Opening/closing from in‐side 38

Opening/closing via doorlock 37

Opening/closing with remotecontrol 35

Operating concept, iDrive 19 Outside air, refer to Automatic

recirculated-air control 129 Outside temperature warn‐

ing 75 Overheating of engine, refer to

Coolant temperature 76

PPaint, vehicle 252 Pairing, mobile phone 204 Panic mode 36 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 Park Distance Control

PDC 115 Parked-car ventilation 133 Parked vehicle, condensa‐

tion 148 Parking aid, refer to PDC 115 Parking brake 66 Parking lamps 86 Parking lamps, bulb replace‐

ment 242 Parking with Auto Hold 68 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 59 Pathway lines, backup cam‐

era 120 PDC Park Distance Con‐

trol 115 Pedestrian detection, refer to

Night Vision 123 People detection, refer to

Night Vision 123 Permissible axle load 258 Personal Profile 33

Seite 271


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Pinch protection system, glasssunroof 46

Pinch protection system, win‐dows 44

Plastic, care 253 Position, storing 156 Postal code, entering in navi‐

gation 155 Power failure 244 Power output, engine 257 Power windows 44 Pressure monitor, tires 92 Pressure, tire air pres‐

sure 227 Pressure warning, tires 95 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 33 Programmable memory but‐

tons, iDrive 23 Protective function, glass sun‐

roof 46 Protective function, win‐

dows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 19

RRadiator fluid 237 Radio 174 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 32 Radio ready state 65 Rain sensor 71 Random 182 Random playback 182 RDS 175 Rear automatic climate con‐

trol 132 Rear axle steering 102 Rear entertainment 196 Rear fog lamp, bulb replace‐

ment 243 Rear lamps 242 Rear seats, adjusting 51 Rear seats, basic position 53 Rear sockets 137 Rearview mirror 58

Rear window defroster 130 Recirculated-air mode 129 Recommended tire

brands 231 Refueling 224 Release tool 240 Remaining range 77 Remote control/key 32 Remote control, malfunc‐

tion 37 Remote control, rear enter‐

tainment 197 Remote control, univer‐

sal 134 Replacement fuse 245 Replacing parts 240 Replacing wheels/tires 231 Reporting safety defects 8 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 77 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐

itor TPM 93 Residual heat, automatic cli‐

mate control 130 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 149 Retreaded tires 231 Road, avoiding 162 Road detour 162 Roadside Assistance 217 Roadside parking lamps 87 Roller sunblinds 45 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐

namic Drive 102 Roof load capacity 258 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 149 Rope for tow-starting/tow‐

ing 250 Route 162 Route criteria, route 162 Route, displaying 162 Route section, bypassing 163 RPM, engine 257 RSC Runflat System Compo‐

nent, refer to Run-flattires 232

Rubber components,care 252

Run-flat tires 232 Run-flat tires, flat tire 93, 96

SSafe braking 147 Safety 6 Safety belt reminder 54 Safety belts 53 Safety belts, care 253 Safety switch, windows 45 Safety systems, airbags 90 Satellite radio 176 Saving fuel 150 Scale, changing during navi‐

gation 164 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐

play 19 Screw driver 240 Screw thread for tow fit‐

ting 249 Search, refer to BMW

Search 218 Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 53 Seat heating, front 50 Seat heating, rear 53 Seating position for chil‐

dren 61 Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory 57 Seats 48 Seats, rear, adjusting 51 Seat ventilation, front 51 Seat ventilation, rear 53 Selection list in instrument

cluster 77 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 73 Self-leveling suspension, air

suspension 103 Self-leveling suspension, mal‐

function 103 Sensors, care 253 Service and warranty 7

Seite 272


Ever

ythi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Service requirements, CBSCondition Based Serv‐ice 238

Service requirements, dis‐play 82

Service, Roadside Assis‐tance 247

Settings on Control Dis‐play 80

Settings, storing for seat, mir‐rors, steering wheel 57

Shifting, automatic transmis‐sion 72

Short commands 259 Shoulder support 50 Side airbags 90 Side View 122 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 37 Sitting safely 48 Size 256 Ski and snowboard bag 139 Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Smallest turning circle 257 Smoker's package 136 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 212 Snow chains 232 Socket 136 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐

nostics 238 Spare fuse 245 Special destinations, naviga‐

tion 157 Specified oil types 236 Speed limit detection 84 Speed limit, setting 78 Speedometer 14 Split screen 23 Split screen map set‐

tings 164 Spoken instructions, naviga‐

tion 163 SPORT+ program, Dynamic

Driving Control 104 SPORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control 104

Sport program, transmis‐sion 73

Stability control systems 101 Start/Stop button 65 Start function during malfunc‐

tion 33 Starting aid 247 Starting the engine 65 State/province, selecting for

navigation 154 Stations, stored 180 Station, storing 174 Status display, tires 93 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering, Integral Active

Steering 102 Steering wheel, adjusting 59 Steering wheel heating 60 Steering wheel memory 57 Steptronic, automatic trans‐

mission 72 Stopping the engine 66 Storage compartment in the

center console 142 Storage compartments 140 Storage compartments, loca‐

tions 140 Storage, tires 232 Storing the vehicle 253 Street, entering for naviga‐

tion 155 Summer tires, tread 230 Surround View 118 Suspension settings 103 Switch for Dynamic Driving

Control 103 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 133 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6

TTachometer 76 Tail and brake lamps 242 Tailgate 38 Tailgate, automatic 39

Tailgate, emergency unlock‐ing 41

Tailgate, hotel function 41 Tailgate via remote control 36 Tail lamps 242 Tail lamps, bulb replace‐

ment 242 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 6 Technical data 256 Telephone 204 TeleService 217 Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 129 Temperature display, external

temperature 75 Temperature, engine oil 76 Terminal 0 65 Terminal 15 65 Terminal R 65 Terminal, starting aid 247 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 42 Theft protection, lug

bolts 244 Theft protection, refer to Cen‐

tral locking system 35 Thermal camera, refer to Night

Vision 123 Thigh support 48 Through-loading system 137 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Tilt, seats 48 Tire age 231 Tire damage 230 Tire identification marks 229 Tire inflation pressure 227 Tire inflation pressure monitor,

refer to FTM 95 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 92 Tires, changing 231 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 227 Tires, flat tire 244 Tires, run-flat tires 232 Tire tread 230 Toll roads, route 162

Seite 273


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

Tone 172 Tool kit 240 Tools 240 Top View 118 Torque, engine 257 Total vehicle weight 258 Tow fitting 248 Towing 248 Town/city, navigation 154 Tow-starting 248 Tow truck 250 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 92 Traction control 101 TRACTION program, Dynamic

Driving Control 104 Traffic bulletins, naviga‐

tion 165 Traffic obstruction, bypass‐

ing 167 Traffic situation/gray

card 166 Transmission, automatic 72 Transporting children

safely 61 Tread, tires 230 Treble, tone 172 Trip computer 79 Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 70 Trip odometer 75 Truck for tow-starting/tow‐

ing 250 Trunk 137 Trunk cover 137 Trunk, expanding 137 Trunk lid 38 Trunk lid, automatic 39 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐

ing 41 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Trunk lid via remote con‐

trol 36 Trunk partition 138 Trunk, storage compart‐

ments 143 Turning circle 257

Turning circle lines, backupcamera 121

Turn signals, front, bulb re‐placement 241

Turn signals, operation 70 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐

placement 242

UUnintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 81 Universal remote control 134 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 73 Unlocking/locking from in‐

side 38 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 37 Unlocking/locking with remote

control 35 Upholstery care 252 USB audio interface 193 USB interface 140

VVariable Damping Control, re‐

fer to Dynamic DampingControl 102

Variable steering, Integral Ac‐tive Steering 102

Vehicle battery 244 Vehicle battery, replacing 244 Vehicle, breaking in 146 Vehicle care 252 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification numberin the engine compart‐ment 234

Vehicle jack 244 Vehicle paint 252 Vehicle storage 253 Vehicle wash 251 Ventilation 131 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car

ventilation 133

Version of navigationdata 167

Video playback 183 Voice activation, mobile

phone 210 Voice activation, short com‐

mands 259 Voice activation system 25 Volume, setting 172

WWarning lamps 14 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 83 Warning triangle 247 Washer fluid 72 Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐

pacity 258 Washer nozzles, wind‐

shield 71 Washer system 70 Washing, vehicle 251 Water on roads 147 Weather Band 175 Weights 258 Welcome lamps 86 Wheel base, vehicle 257 Wheel change 243 Wheels, changing 231 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 227 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 95 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 92 Width with mirrors, vehi‐

cle 256 Width without mirrors, vehi‐

cle 256 Window defroster, rear 130 Windows, powered 44 Windshield, climate con‐

trol 147 Windshield washer fluid 72 Windshield washer noz‐

zles 71

Seite 274


Ever

ythi

ng fr

om A

to Z

Windshield washer sys‐tem 70

Windshield wiper 70 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 72 Winter storage, care 253 Winter tires, suitable

tires 231 Winter tires, tread 230 Wiper blades, replacing 240 Wiper fluid 72 Wiper system 70 Wood, care 252 Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 24 Wrench 240

XXenon headlamps, bulb re‐

placement 241

YYour individual vehicle 6

Seite 275


Re

fere

nce

Mob

ility

Com

mun

icat

ion

Ente

rtain

men

tNa

vigat

ion

Drivi

ng ti

psCo

ntro

lsAt

a gl

ance

More about BMW

bmwusa.comThe Ultimate Driving

Machine

01 4

1 2

604

413

ue

*BL260441300K*Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500

2010_5seriesgranturismo_ownersmanual

Documents